Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche manual

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582

Go to page of

A good user manual

The rules should oblige the seller to give the purchaser an operating instrucion of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche, along with an item. The lack of an instruction or false information given to customer shall constitute grounds to apply for a complaint because of nonconformity of goods with the contract. In accordance with the law, a customer can receive an instruction in non-paper form; lately graphic and electronic forms of the manuals, as well as instructional videos have been majorly used. A necessary precondition for this is the unmistakable, legible character of an instruction.

What is an instruction?

The term originates from the Latin word „instructio”, which means organizing. Therefore, in an instruction of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche one could find a process description. An instruction's purpose is to teach, to ease the start-up and an item's use or performance of certain activities. An instruction is a compilation of information about an item/a service, it is a clue.

Unfortunately, only a few customers devote their time to read an instruction of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche. A good user manual introduces us to a number of additional functionalities of the purchased item, and also helps us to avoid the formation of most of the defects.

What should a perfect user manual contain?

First and foremost, an user manual of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche should contain:
- informations concerning technical data of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche
- name of the manufacturer and a year of construction of the Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche item
- rules of operation, control and maintenance of the Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche item
- safety signs and mark certificates which confirm compatibility with appropriate standards

Why don't we read the manuals?

Usually it results from the lack of time and certainty about functionalities of purchased items. Unfortunately, networking and start-up of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche alone are not enough. An instruction contains a number of clues concerning respective functionalities, safety rules, maintenance methods (what means should be used), eventual defects of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche, and methods of problem resolution. Eventually, when one still can't find the answer to his problems, he will be directed to the Chevrolet service. Lately animated manuals and instructional videos are quite popular among customers. These kinds of user manuals are effective; they assure that a customer will familiarize himself with the whole material, and won't skip complicated, technical information of Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche.

Why one should read the manuals?

It is mostly in the manuals where we will find the details concerning construction and possibility of the Chevrolet 2010 Avalanche item, and its use of respective accessory, as well as information concerning all the functions and facilities.

After a successful purchase of an item one should find a moment and get to know with every part of an instruction. Currently the manuals are carefully prearranged and translated, so they could be fully understood by its users. The manuals will serve as an informational aid.

Table of contents for the manual

  • Page 1

    2010 Chevrolet A valanche Owner Manual M In Brief ................ .......... ........... ....... 1 - 1 I n s t r u m e n t P a n e l ... .............................. 1 - 2 Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 V ehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Performance and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Seats and Restraint System ...................... 2 - 1 Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 F r o n t S e a t s ...................... ................. 2 - 4 R e a r S e a t s ...................................... 2 - 1 3 Safety Be[...]

  • Page 2

    2010 Chevrolet A valanche Owner Manual M F r o n t A x l e ....................................... 6 - 4 7 H e a d l a m p A i m i n g ............................... 6 - 4 8 B u l b R e p l a c e m e n t ... ........................... 6 - 5 0 Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . 6-53 T i r e s ............. .......................... ..... 6 - 5 4 Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 V ehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-103 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 12 Main[...]

  • Page 3

    GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET , the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the names A V ALANCHE and Z71 are registered trademarks of General Motors. This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle either because they are options that you did not purchase or due to changes subsequent to the printing of this owner manual. Please refer to the purchase documentation relating to your specific vehicle to confirm each of the features found on your vehicle. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “ General Motors of Canada Limited ” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual. Keep this manual in the vehicle for quick reference. Ca[...]

  • Page 4

    Safety W arnings and Symbols W arning messages found on vehicle labels and in this manual describe hazards and what to do to avoid or reduce them. Danger indicates a hazard with a high level of risk which will result in serious injury or death. W arning or Caution indicates a hazard that could result in injury or death. { W ARNING: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. Notice: This means there is something that could result in property or vehicle damage. This would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty . A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “ Do Not, ” “ Do not do this, ” or “ Do not let this happen. ” V ehicle Symbo[...]

  • Page 5

    V ehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the index. 0 : Adjustable Pedals 9 : Airbag Readiness Light # : Air Conditioning ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar ® $ : Brake System Warning Light " : Charging System I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant T emperature O : Exterior Lamps # : Fog Lamps . : Fuel Gage + : Fuses i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer j : LA TCH System Child Restraints * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors } : Power / : Remote V ehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders 7 : T[...]

  • Page 6

    2 NOTES vi[...]

  • Page 7

    Section 1 In Brief Instrument Panel .................................. . 1-2 Initial Drive Information .. ................ ......... 1-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Remote V ehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Midgate ® .................... .................... 1 - 6 T a i l g a t e .......... ...................... ......... 1 - 6 W i n d o w s ........................................ 1 - 6 Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7 Heated and Cooled Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 8

    Instrument Panel 1-2[...]

  • Page 9

    A. Outlet Adjustment on page 4 ‑ 25 . B. T urn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 4 ‑ 4 . C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 4 ‑ 26 . D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 . E. Shift Lever . See Automatic T ransmission Operation on page 3 ‑ 37 . F . T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 42 (If Equipped). G. Driver Information Center (DIC) Buttons. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 ‑ 43 . H. Audio System(s) on page 4 ‑ 77 . I. Exterior Lamps on page 4 ‑ 10 . J. Dome Lamp Override on page 4 ‑ 14 . Instrument Panel Brightness on page 4 ‑ 13 . Fog Lamps on page 4 ‑ 13 (If Equipped). K. Automatic Transfer Case Control. (If Equipped). See Four-Wheel Drive (T wo Speed A[...]

  • Page 10

    Initial Drive Information This section provides a brief overview about some of the important features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle. For more detailed information, refer to each of the features which can be found later in this owner manual. Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System The RKE transmitter is used to remotely lock and unlock the doors from up to 60 m (195 feet) away from the vehicle. Press K to unlock the driver door . Press K again within five seconds to unlock all remaining doors. Press Q to lock all doors. Lock and unlock feedback can be personalized. Press L and release to locate the vehicle. Press L and hold for three seconds to sound the panic alarm. Press L again[...]

  • Page 11

    Remote V ehicle Start With this feature the engine can be started from outside of the vehicle. Starting the V ehicle 1. Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle. 2. Press Q . 3. Immediately after completing Step 2, press and hold / until the turn signal lamps flash. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running. The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on. The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps for a 10-minute time extension. Remote start can be extended only once. Canceling a Remote Start T o cancel a remote start: . Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press and hold / until the p[...]

  • Page 12

    Midgate ® This vehicle is equipped with a Midgate ® and a removable rear glass panel. The Midgate allows you to extend the length of the vehicle's cargo area. For more information see Midgate ® on page 3 ‑ 13 . T ailgate Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or power door lock switch to lock and unlock the tailgate. Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you. T o close the tailgate, push it firmly upward until it latches. Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it is latched securely . T ailgate Removal The tailgate is not to be removed. This may cause damage to the electrical connector resulting in a loss of lock/unlock and rear v[...]

  • Page 13

    Seat Adjustment Front Seats Manual Seats If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved forward or rearward. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar . T ry to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. See Manual Seats on page 2 ‑ 4 . Power Seats If equipped, the power seat controls are located on the outboard side of the front seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. Raise or lower the front or rear part of the cushion by moving the front or rear part of the control up or down. Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. See Power S[...]

  • Page 14

    Manual Lumbar If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the knob forward or rearward. Power Lumbar If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side of the seat. On vehicles with two-way lumbar , press and hold the top of the control to increase lumbar support. T o decrease, press and hold the bottom of the control. On vehicles with four-way lumbar , press and hold the front of the control to increase lumbar support. T o decrease, press and hold the rear of the control. T o raise the height of the support, press and hold the top of the control. T o lower , press and hold the bottom of the control. See Power L[...]

  • Page 15

    Manual Reclining Seatbacks If equipped, this control is located on the outboard side of the seat. T o recline the seatback: 1. Lift the recline lever . 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 10 . Power Reclining Seatbacks If available, this control is located on the outboard side of the seat. T o recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward. T o bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 2 ‑ 10 . 1-9[...]

  • Page 16

    Memory Features This vehicle may have the memory package. The controls for this feature are located on the driver door , and are used to program and recall memory settings for the driver seat, outside mirrors, and the adjustable throttle and brake pedal feature. For more information, see Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 . Heated and Cooled Seats On vehicles with heated front seats, or heated and cooled front seats, the controls are located on the driver and passenger doors. { (If Equipped): Press to cool the entire seat. + : Press to heat the seatback only . z : Press to heat the seat and seatback. Continue to press the desired button to cycle through the temperature settings[...]

  • Page 17

    Safety Belt Refer to the following sections for important information on how to use safety belts properly . . Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2 ‑ 15 . . How to Wear Safety Belts Properly on page 2 ‑ 20 . . Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 29 . . Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 47 . Sensing System for Passenger Airbag The passenger sensing system, if equipped, will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The driver airbags, seat ‐ mounted side impact airbags and roof ‐ rail airbags are not affected by this. If the vehicle has one of the indicators pictured in the following illustrations, then the vehicle has[...]

  • Page 18

    Mirror Adjustment Exterior Mirrors V ehicles with outside power mirrors and foldaway mirrors have controls located on the driver door . 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger side mirror . 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror . 3. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. Power Foldaway Mirrors T o fold the mirrors: 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. Manual Foldaway Mirrors Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. T o fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to[...]

  • Page 19

    Steering Wheel Adjustment The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the steering column. T o adjust the steering wheel: 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever . 2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position. 3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in place. See Tilt Wheel on page 4 ‑ 3 . Throttle and Brake Pedal Adjustment On vehicles with this feature, you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body . Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away f[...]

  • Page 20

    Interior Lighting Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened. They turn off after all the doors are closed. The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column, clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed. k : The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control. Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened. Reading Lamps For vehicles with reading[...]

  • Page 21

    Exterior Lighting The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. 9 (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). AUTO (Automatic) : Automatically turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps. ; (Parking Lamps) : T urns on the parking lamps and taillamps. 2 (Headlamps) : Turns on the headlamps, parking lamps, and taillamps. For more information, see: . Exterior Lamps on page 4 ‑ 10 . . Daytime Runnin[...]

  • Page 22

    Climate Controls The heating, cooling, defrost, defog and ventilation of the vehicle can be controlled with these systems. A. Fan Control B. Outside Air C. Air Recirculation D. Air Delivery Mode Control E. Air Conditioning F . Driver and Passenger T emperature Controls G. Rear Window Defogger A. Driver and Passenger T emperature Controls B. Fan Control C. AUTO D. Defrost E. Air Recirculation F . Outside Air G. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Display I. Power Button J. Rear Window Defogger K. Air Conditioning L. P ASS See Climate Control System on page 4 ‑ 16 and Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 4 ‑ 19 . 1-16[...]

  • Page 23

    V ehicle Features Radio(s) Radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port O : Press to turn the system on and off. Turn to increase or decrease the volume. BAND : Press to choose between FM, AM, or XM ™ , if equipped. f : Select radio stations. © ¨ : Seek or scan stations. 4 : Press to display additional text information related to the current FM-RDS or XM station; or CD, MP3 or WMA song. If information is available during XM, CD, MP3 or WMA playback, the song title information displays on the top line of the display and artist information displays on the bottom line. When information is not available, “ NO INFO ” displays. For more information about these and other radio features, see Radio(s) on[...]

  • Page 24

    Setting the Clock T o set the time and date for the radio with CD, DVD, and USB Port: 1. T urn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then press O , to turn the radio on. 2. Press G to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour , minute, month, day , and year). 3. Press the softkey located under any one of the labels to be changed. 4. T o increase or decrease the time or date, turn f clockwise or counter ‐ clockwise. For detailed instructions on setting the clock for the vehicle's specific audio system, see Setting the Clock on page 4 ‑ 78 . Satellite Radio XM is a satellite radio service that is based in the 48 contiguous United States and 10 Canadian provinces. XM satellite radio h[...]

  • Page 25

    Steering Wheel Controls For vehicles with audio steering wheel controls, some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. w / x : Press to change favorite radio stations, select tracks on a CD/DVD, or to navigate tracks or folders on an iPod ® or USB device. b g : Press to silence the vehicle speakers only . Press again to turn the sound on. Press and hold longer than two seconds to interact with OnStar ® or Bluetooth systems, if equipped. + e − e : Increases or decreases volume. c : Press to reject an incoming call, or to end a call. SRCE : Press to switch between the radio, CD, and for vehicles with, DVD, front auxiliary , and rear auxiliary . ¨ : Press to seek the next radi[...]

  • Page 26

    Driver Information Center (DIC) The DIC display is located at the bottom of the instrument panel cluster . It shows the status of many vehicle systems and enables access to the personalization menu. The DIC buttons are located on the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. 3 (T rip/Fuel): Press this button to display the odometer , trip odometer , fuel range, average economy , fuel used, timer , and transmission temperature. The compass and outside air temperature will also be shown in the display . The temperature will be shown in °F or °C depending on the units selected. T (V ehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles [...]

  • Page 27

    V ehicle Customization Some vehicle features can be programmed by using the DIC buttons next to the steering wheel. These features include: . Language . Door Lock and Unlock Settings . RKE Lock and Unlock Feedback . Lighting . Chime V olume . Memory Features . Remote Start . Digital Speedometer Display See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 68 . Cruise Control The cruise control buttons are located on left side of the steering wheel. T : T urns the system on or off. The indicator light is on when cruise control is on and turns off when cruise control is off. + RES : Press to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a previously set speed. SET − : Press to set the sp[...]

  • Page 28

    Rear Vision Camera (RVC) The rear vision camera displays a view of the area behind the vehicle when the vehicle is shifted into R (Reverse) on the inside rear view mirror or the navigation screen, if equipped. T o clean the camera lense, located below the tailgate handle, rinse it with water and wipe it with a soft cloth. Ultrasonic Parking Assist This feature uses sensors on the rear bumper to detect objects while parking the vehicle. It operates at speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph). URP A uses audio beeps to provide distance and system information. Keep the sensors on the vehicle's rear bumper clean to ensure proper operation. The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid dis[...]

  • Page 29

    Performance and Maintenance StabiliT rak ® The vehicle may have a traction control system that limits wheel spin and the StabiliT rak system that assists with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. Both systems turn on automatically every time the vehicle is started. . T o turn off traction control, press and release 5 on the instrument panel. F illuminates and the appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 57 . . T o turn off both traction control and Electronic Stability Control, press and hold 5 until F illuminates and the appropriate DIC message displays. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 57 . . Press and release [...]

  • Page 30

    Y ou may notice during cooler conditions that the low tire pressure warning light will appear when the vehicle is first started and then turn off as you drive. This may be an early indicator that your tire pressures are getting low and the tires need to be inflated to the proper pressure. Note: The T ire Pressure Monitor can alert you about low tire pressure, but it does not replace normal monthly tire maintenance. It is the driver ’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressures. See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 6 ‑ 64 and Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 ‑ 65 . Engine Oil Life System The engine oil life system calculates engine oil life based on vehicle use and,[...]

  • Page 31

    Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) This vehicle has a yellow fuel cap and can use either unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85). See Gasoline Octane on page 6 ‑ 6 and Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 6 ‑ 8 . Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible. . Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly . . Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. . Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. . When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped. . Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. . Keep vehicle tires proper[...]

  • Page 32

    OnStar ® OnStar ® uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety , security , navigation, diagnostics, and calling services. Automatic Crash Response In a crash, built in sensors can automatically alert an OnStar advisor who is immediately connected to the vehicle to see if you need help. How OnStar Service Works Q : This blue button connects you to a specially trained OnStar advisor to verify your account information and to answer questions. ] : Push this red emergency button to get priority help from specially trained OnStar emergency advisors. X : Push this button for hands ‐ free, voice ‐ activated calling and to give voice commands for tur[...]

  • Page 33

    The OnStar system can record and transmit vehicle information. This information is automatically sent to an OnStar call center when Q is pressed, ] is pressed, or if the airbags or ACR system deploy . This information usually includes the vehicle's GPS location and, in the event of a crash, additional information regarding the crash that the vehicle was involved in (e.g. the direction from which the vehicle was hit). When the virtual advisor feature of OnStar hands-free calling is used, the vehicle also sends OnStar the vehicle's GPS location so they can provide services where it is located. Location information about the vehicle is only available if the GPS satellite signals are u[...]

  • Page 34

    2 NOTES 1-28[...]

  • Page 35

    Section 2 Seats and Restraint System Head Restraints ............................... ..... 2-2 Front Seats ......................................... 2-4 Manual Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4 Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Manual Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Power Lumbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 H e a t e d S e a t s ................................ ... 2 - 7 Heated and Cooled Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8[...]

  • Page 36

    Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. { W ARNING: With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly , there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly . Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant's head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. 2-2[...]

  • Page 37

    Pull the head restraint up to raise it. T o lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the restraint down. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The head restraints are not designed to be removed. The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up and down. 2-3[...]

  • Page 38

    Front Seats Manual Seats { W ARNING: Y ou can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver's seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver's seat only when the vehicle is not moving. If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved forward or rearward. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar . T ry to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. 2-4[...]

  • Page 39

    Power Seats Driver's Seat with Power Seat Control, Power Recline, and Power Lumbar shown On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. Y our vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle's power seat: . Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. . Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down. . Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is locat[...]

  • Page 40

    Manual Lumbar On vehicles with this feature the control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the knob forward or rearward. Power Lumbar On seats with power lumbar , the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats. This vehicle may have 2 – way lumbar . . T o increase lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control. . T o decrease lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control. 2-6[...]

  • Page 41

    The vehicle may have 4 – way lumbar . . T o increase lumbar support, press and hold the front of the control. . T o decrease lumbar support, press and hold the rear of the control. . T o raise the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control. . T o lower the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control. Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support. Y our vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information. Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips, so sh[...]

  • Page 42

    Heated and Cooled Seats If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat feature, the buttons used to control this feature are located on the front doors near the door handle. { (Cooled Seat): T o cool the entire seat, press the button with the cooled seat symbol. This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to turn the cooled seat off. Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of cooling selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low . + (Heated Seatback): T o heat only the seatback, press the button with the heated seatback symbol. T[...]

  • Page 43

    T o save seating positions in memory: 1. Adjust the driver's seatback recliner , both outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 3 ‑ 57 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 3 ‑ 35 for more information. Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake pedals will have the ability to save and recall their positions. 2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to indicate that the position has been stored. A second seating, mirror , and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2. T o recall the memory positions, the vehicle must be in P (Park).[...]

  • Page 44

    Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver ’ s door panel between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in P (Park), the driver's seat exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. Y ou will hear a single beep, and the driver ’ s seat will move back. If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See “ EASY EXIT SEA T ” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 68 for more information. The memory seat and easy exit features can also be programmed using the DIC. For programming information, see DIC V ehicle Cu[...]

  • Page 45

    { W ARNING: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either . In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly . 2-1 1[...]

  • Page 46

    Manual Reclining Seatbacks On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat(s). T o recline the seatback: 1. Lift the recline lever . 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. T o return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 2-12[...]

  • Page 47

    Power Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control. . T o recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward. . T o bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward. Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. Center Seat Y our vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/ storage area for the driver and passenger when the center seat is not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down. Rear Seats Rear Seat Operation The rear seat is a 60/40 split bench seat [...]

  • Page 48

    T o fold either side of the seat do the following: 1. Push the rear seat head restraints all the way down. 2. Pull the seat loop located where the seatback and seat cushion meet. The seat cushion will release and allow you to tilt it toward the front of the vehicle. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 3. Fold the seatback forward until it is flat. Y ou may have to move the front seats forward slightly to do this. 4. Repeat the procedure for the other side. T o return the seats to the normal position, push t[...]

  • Page 49

    { W ARNING: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. { W ARNING: If the seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always be sure to press the rear of the seat cushion down. This action locks the seatback in place. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Raise the head restraint. Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Ever[...]

  • Page 50

    { W ARNING: People riding on the tailgate (if equipped) can easily lose their balance and fall even when the vehicle is operated at low speeds. Falling from a moving vehicle may result in serious injuries or death. { W ARNING: It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly . Y our vehicle has indicators as a reminder to buckle your safety belts. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4[...]

  • Page 51

    Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. T ake the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. Put someone on it. 2-17[...]

  • Page 52

    Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 2-18[...]

  • Page 53

    or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. Y ou get more time to stop. Y ou stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. 2-19[...]

  • Page 54

    Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: Y ou could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collisio[...]

  • Page 55

    Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts. First, before you or your passenger(s) wear a safety belt, there is important information you should know . Sit up straight and always keep your feet on the floor in front of you. The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones and you would be less likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder a[...]

  • Page 56

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury . The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body . 2-22[...]

  • Page 57

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 2-23[...]

  • Page 58

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. 2-24[...]

  • Page 59

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest. { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. 2-25[...]

  • Page 60

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury . Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. Y ou could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 2-26[...]

  • Page 61

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is behind the body . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly . In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Y our body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury . Y ou might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 2-27[...]

  • Page 62

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is twisted across the body . { W ARNING: Y ou can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly , or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. 2-28[...]

  • Page 63

    Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position, if the vehicle has one, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on page 2 ‑ 35 for more information. The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly . 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. T o see how , see “ Seats ” in the Index. 2. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you. Do not let it get twisted. The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt across you very quickly . If this happens, let the belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt across you more slowly . If the s[...]

  • Page 64

    3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 2 ‑ 36 . Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary . 4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster , move it to the height that is right for you. See “ Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information. 5. T o make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be n[...]

  • Page 65

    T o unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way . If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle. Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger positions. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder . The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder . Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Squeeze the buttons (A) on the [...]

  • Page 66

    Safety Belt Pretensioners This vehicle has safety belt pretensioners for front outboard occupants. Although the safety belt pretensioners cannot be seen, they are part of the safety belt assembly . They can help tighten the safety belts during the early stages of a moderate to severe frontal, near frontal, or rear crash if the threshold conditions for pretensioner activation are met. And, if the vehicle has side impact airbags, safety belt pretensioners can help tighten the safety belts in a side crash or a rollover event. Pretensioners work only once. If the pretensioners activate in a crash, they will need to be replaced, and probably other new parts for the vehicle's safety belt syst[...]

  • Page 67

    2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. 2-33[...]

  • Page 68

    { W ARNING: A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder . T o remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the side of the seat. 2-34[...]

  • Page 69

    Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy . The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother . When a safety belt is worn properly , it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly . Lap Belt This part is only for the lap belt. T o learn how to wear a lap-shoulder belt, see La[...]

  • Page 70

    T o make the belt shorter , pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 2 ‑ 36 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary . If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle's safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/ retailer will order you an extender . When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat[...]

  • Page 71

    Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle's safety belts. The manufacturer's instructions that come with the booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for that booster . Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test: . Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. . Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “ Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 29 fo[...]

  • Page 72

    Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child's pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Also see “ Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 2 ‑ 29 . According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the[...]

  • Page 73

    { W ARNING: Never do this. Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly . In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury . The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 2-39[...]

  • Page 74

    Infants and Y oung Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { W ARNING: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts. Airbags plus lap ‐ shoulder belts offer protection for ad[...]

  • Page 75

    { W ARNING: Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. 2-41[...]

  • Page 76

    Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle's owner , are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child's weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer&[...]

  • Page 77

    { W ARNING: A young child's hip bones are still so small that the vehicle's regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child's abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. T o reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints. Child Restraint Systems A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to[...]

  • Page 78

    A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle's safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window . Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the V ehicle { W ARNING: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle's safety belt or LA TCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. 2-44[...]

  • Page 79

    T o help reduce the chance of injury , the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LA TCH system. See Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 47 for more information. A child can be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacem[...]

  • Page 80

    A label on your sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. ” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { W ARNING: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. The vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal a[...]

  • Page 81

    { W ARNING: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a child restraint in the center front seat. It is always better to secure a child restraint in a rear seat. Do not use child restraints in the center front seat position. When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure the child restraint properly . Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the veh[...]

  • Page 82

    Lower Anchors Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LA TCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B). T op T ether Anchor A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Y our child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anch[...]

  • Page 83

    In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether , and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If the child restraint does not have a top tether , one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. Lower Anchor and T op T ether Anchor Locations Rear Seat i (T op T ether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. The right side rear passenger and center seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat [...]

  • Page 84

    The top tether anchors are located on the back of the rear seat frame above the floor for each rear seating position. Fold down the rear seatback(s) to access the anchors. See Rear Seat Operation on page 2 ‑ 13 . Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint [...]

  • Page 85

    { W ARNING: Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor . Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. T o reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor . { W ARNING: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has one, a[...]

  • Page 86

    1. 3. Route the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions: If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether , route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether , route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether , route the tether around the headrest or head restraint. If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether , raise the headrest or head res[...]

  • Page 87

    { W ARNING: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 1. 5. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward. Then lower the seat cushion until the seatback and the seat cushion lock into position. 2. Attach the lower attachments to the lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have lower attachments or the desired seating position does not have lower anchors, secure the child restraint with the top tether and the safety belts. Refer to your child restraint manufacturer instructions and the instructions in this manual. 2. 1. Find the lo[...]

  • Page 88

    Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint has the LA TCH system, see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 47 for how and where to install the child restraint using LA TCH. If you secure a child restraint using a safety belt and it uses a top tether , see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 47 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the to[...]

  • Page 89

    3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary . 4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 2-55[...]

  • Page 90

    5. T o tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt, and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor . When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. If the child restraint has a top tether , follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions regarding the use of the top tether . See Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 47 . 6. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. T o remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt a[...]

  • Page 91

    Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position This vehicle has airbags. A rear seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 2 ‑ 45 . In addition, the vehicle may have a passenger sensing system which is designed to turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 71 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 ‑ 29 for more information, including important safety information. A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. ” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deplo[...]

  • Page 92

    If the child restraint has the LA TCH system, see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 47 for how and where to install the child restraint using LA TCH. If a child restraint is secured using a safety belt and it uses a top tether , see Lower Anchors and T ethers for Children (LA TCH) on page 2 ‑ 47 for top tether anchor locations. Do not secure a child seat in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be anchored, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top strap must be anchored. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether , and that the teth[...]

  • Page 93

    4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary . 5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 2-59[...]

  • Page 94

    6. T o tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor . When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. If the vehicle is equipped with the passenger sensing system, and when the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when you start the vehicle. See Passe[...]

  • Page 95

    Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags: . A frontal airbag for the driver . . A frontal airbag for the right front passenger . . A seat ‐ mounted side impact airbag for the driver . . A seat ‐ mounted side impact airbag for the right front passenger . . A roof-rail airbag for the driver and the passenger seated directly behind the driver . . A roof-rail airbag for the right front passenger and the person seated directly behind the right front passenger . All of the airbags in the vehicle will have the word AIRBAG embossed in the trim or on an attached label near the deployment opening. For frontal airbags, the word AIRBAG will appear on the middle part of the steering wheel [...]

  • Page 96

    Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { W ARNING: Y ou can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 2 ‑ 66 . Wearing your safety belt during a crash helps reduce your chance of hitting things inside the vehicle or being ejected from it. Airbags are “ supplemental restraints ” to the safety belts. Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety belt properly — wheth[...]

  • Page 97

    { W ARNING: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle's safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Y oung children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. T o read how, see Older Children on page 2 ‑ 37 or Infants and Y oung Children on page 2 ‑ 40 . There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster , which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airba[...]

  • Page 98

    The right front passenger frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger's side. Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar The seat ‐ mounted side impact airbags for the driver and right front passenger are in the side of the seatbacks closest to the door . 2-64[...]

  • Page 99

    Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar The roof-rail airbags for the driver , right front passenger , and second row outboard passengers are in the ceiling above the side windows. { W ARNING: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear . Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Do not use seat accessories that block the inflation path of a seat-mounted side impact airbag. Never secure anything to the[...]

  • Page 100

    When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver's or right front passenger's head and chest. However , they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether the frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows[...]

  • Page 101

    In addition, the vehicle has dual-stage frontal airbags. Dual-stage airbags adjust the restraint according to crash severity . The vehicle has electronic frontal sensors, which help the sensing system distinguish between a moderate frontal impact and a more severe frontal impact. For moderate frontal impacts, dual-stage airbags inflate at a level less than full deployment. For more severe frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. The vehicle has a seat position sensor . V ehicles with dual stage airbags also have seat position sensors which enable the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver seat. The seat position sensor provides information that is used to determine if the airba[...]

  • Page 102

    What Makes an Airbag Inflate? In a deployment event, the sensing system sends an electrical signal triggering a release of gas from the inflator . Gas from the inflator fills the airbag causing the bag to break out of the cover and deploy . The inflator , the airbag, and related hardware are all part of the airbag module. Frontal airbag modules are located inside the steering wheel and instrument panel. For vehicles with seat ‐ mounted side impact airbags, there are airbags modules in the side of the front seatbacks closest to the door . For vehicles with roof-rail airbags, there are airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle, near the side windows that have occupant seating positions. H[...]

  • Page 103

    What Will Y ou See After an Airbag Inflates? After the frontal airbags and seat-mounted side impact airbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly that some people may not even realize an airbag inflated. Roof-rail airbags may still be at least partially inflated for some time after they deploy . Some components of the airbag module may be hot for several minutes. For location of the airbag modules, see What Makes an Airbag Inflate? on page 2 ‑ 68 . The parts of the airbag that come into contact with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch. There may be some smoke and dust coming from the vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does not prevent the driver from seeing out of th[...]

  • Page 104

    The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn on the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers, and shut off the fuel system after the airbags inflate. Y ou can lock the doors, turn off the interior lamps and hazard warning flashers by using the controls for those features. { W ARNING: A crash severe enough to inflate the airbags may have also damaged important functions in the vehicle, such as the fuel system, brake and steering systems, etc. Even if the vehicle appears to be drivable after a moderate crash, there may be concealed damage that could make it difficult to safely operate the vehicle. Use caution if you should attempt to restart the engine after a cras[...]

  • Page 105

    Passenger Sensing System If the vehicle has the passenger airbag status indicator pictured in the following illustration, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator , if equipped, is visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started. In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, the label on the vehicle's sun visors refers to “ ADV ANCED AIRBAGS ” . United States Canada The words ON and OFF , or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. If you are using remote start, if equipped, to start the vehicle from a distan[...]

  • Page 106

    A label on the sun visor says, “ Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front. ” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { W ARNING: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-sa[...]

  • Page 107

    When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 4 ‑ 29 . The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active. For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger se[...]

  • Page 108

    4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 2 ‑ 57 . 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, if adjustable, to make sure that the vehicle seatback is not pushing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Also make sure the child restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust the head restraint. See Head Restraints on page 2 ‑ 2 . 6. Restart the vehicle. The [...]

  • Page 109

    If this happens, use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag: 1. T urn the vehicle off. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position. 4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended. 5. Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for two to three minutes after the on indicator is lit. Additional Factors Affecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers a[...]

  • Page 110

    Servicing Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Y our dealer/retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. T o purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 8 ‑ 16 . { W ARNING: For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. Y ou can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service p[...]

  • Page 111

    or with GM covers, upholstery or trim designed for a different vehicle. Any object, such as an aftermarket seat heater or a comfort enhancing pad or device, installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 71 . If you have any questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step T wo of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedu[...]

  • Page 112

    Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly . Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. T orn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away . Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 4 ‑ 27 for more information. Keep safety belts clean and dry . See Care of [...]

  • Page 113

    Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash { W ARNING: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. T o help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new safety belts or LA TCH system (if equipped) parts? After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary . But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/retailer to have the safety bel[...]

  • Page 114

    2 NOTES 2-80[...]

  • Page 115

    Section 3 Features and Controls Keys ........................... ..................... 3-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System O p e r a t i o n ................... ............... ... 3 - 4 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Doors and Locks ......................... ........ 3-10 D o o r L o c k s ........ ............................ 3 - 1 0 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1 Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1 Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1 Rear Door Security Locks . [...]

  • Page 116

    Section 3 Features and Controls Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-50 Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51 Shifting Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 Parking Over Things That Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-53 E n g i n e E x h a u s t ................................ 3 - 5 4 Running the V ehicle While Parked . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-55 Mirrors ...... ................................... ... 3-56 Manual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-56 Outside Power Mirrors[...]

  • Page 117

    Keys { W ARNING: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window . Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. The key can be used for the ignition, all door locks, tailgate, and side storage boxes. See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get [...]

  • Page 118

    Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and RSS-210/21 1 of Industry and Science Canada. Changes or modifications to this system by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment. If there is a decrease in the RKE operating range, try this: . Check the distance. The transmitter may be too far from the vehicle. Stand closer during rainy or snowy weather . . Check the location. Other vehicles or objects may be blocking the signal. T ake a few steps to the left or right, hold the transmitter higher , and try again. . Check the [...]

  • Page 119

    / (Remote V ehicle Start): For vehicles with this feature, press / to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter . See Remote V ehicle Start on page 3 ‑ 7 for additional information. Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors, including the tailgate. If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate locking has occurred. If enabled through the DIC, the horn chirps when Q is pressed again within three seconds of the previous press of the lock button. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 68 for additional information. Pressing Q arms the content theft ‐ deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deter[...]

  • Page 120

    Programming T ransmitters to the V ehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer . When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed. Each vehicle can have up to eight transmitters programmed to it. See “ Relearn Remote Key ” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 43 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 51 for instructions on how to match RKE tran[...]

  • Page 121

    Remote V ehicle Start Y our vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle's heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger . Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position. If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system, the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. During a remote start, if you[...]

  • Page 122

    / (Remote Start) : This button will be on the RKE transmitter if you have remote start. T o start the vehicle using the remote start feature: 1. Aim the transmitter at the vehicle. 2. Press and release the transmitter's lock button. The vehicle's doors will lock. Immediately press and hold the transmitter's remote start button until the turn signal lights flash. If you cannot see the vehicle's lights, press and hold the remote start button for two to four seconds. Pressing the remote start button again after the vehicle has started will turn the engine off. When the vehicle starts, the parking lamps will turn on and remain on while the vehicle is running. If the vehicle i[...]

  • Page 123

    For example, if the lock button and then the remote start buttons are pressed again after the vehicle has been running for five minutes, 10 minutes are added, allowing the engine to run for 15 minutes. The additional ten minutes are considered a second remote vehicle start. Once two remote starts, or a single remote start with one time extension has been done, the vehicle must be started with the key . After the key is removed from the ignition, the vehicle can be remote started again. The vehicle cannot be remote started if the key is in the ignition, the hood is not closed, or if there is an emission control system malfunction and the check engine light comes on. Also, the engine will turn[...]

  • Page 124

    Doors and Locks Door Locks { W ARNING: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. . Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven. (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) . Y oung children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it. . Outs[...]

  • Page 125

    Power Door Locks With power door locks, the switches on the front doors can be used to lock and unlock the vehicle. " (Unlock): Press to unlock the doors. Q (Lock): Remove the key from the ignition and press to lock the doors. Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed. Y ou will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. Pressing the power lock switch will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors. This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition. Y ou can also program this feature using the Driver Information Ce[...]

  • Page 126

    Rear Door Security Locks Y our vehicle has rear door security locks. These prevent passengers from opening the rear doors from the inside. The rear door security locks are located on the inside edge of each rear door . The rear doors must be open to access them. The label showing lock and unlock positions is located near the lock. T o set the locks, do the following: 1. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the horizontal position. 2. Close the door . When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the following: 1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock, using the power door lock switch, or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) tr[...]

  • Page 127

    Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking your key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open. If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock and then the driver's door will unlock. Midgate ® { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to drive with the cargo area covered and the tailgate and the Midgate ® open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. Y ou can not see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drive with the cargo covers on and the (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) tailgate and Midgate ® open or if electrical wiring or other ca[...]

  • Page 128

    The following are the main components of the Midgate ® system: A. Latch Levers B. Grab Handles C. Glass-Catch Release Button D. Glass Lock Knobs E. Window Retaining T abs F . Midgate ® Release Handle G. Window Alignment Arrows Rear Glass Removal and Storage { W ARNING: If the removable rear glass is not stored properly , it could be thrown about the vehicle in a crash or sudden maneuver . People in the vehicle could be injured. Whenever you store the rear glass in the vehicle, always be sure that it is stored securely in the Midgate ® storage pocket. Do not remove the rear glass when the rear defroster is on. If you remove the rear glass with the rear defroster on, you may see a discharge[...]

  • Page 129

    2. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch. Once unlatched, the glass-catch release button (C) will catch the rear glass and prevent it from falling forward. 3. While holding the rear glass in place, press the glass-catch release button (C) and pull the top of the rear glass toward you using the grab handle(s) (B) located at the top of the rear glass. 3-15[...]

  • Page 130

    4. With the rear glass tilted toward you, lift it out from the lower window frame channel. Use the grab handles to assist you in removing the rear glass. 5. Load the rear glass into the storage pocket in the Midgate ® , guiding the lower edge of the rear glass behind the three rear glass retaining tabs (E). Hold the rear glass flat against the storage pocket, with grab handles facing you, until the next step. 3-16[...]

  • Page 131

    6. T urn both glass lock knobs (D), located at both top corners of the storage pocket, to the locked position. Push in on the corner of the rear glass to allow the lock knob to engage more easily . Once both glass lock knobs are in the locked position, the rear glass is securely stored. 7. Push both latch levers up to the locked position. Y ou should hear a click when each latch lever locks correctly . The rear seats can be returned to the normal position when the rear glass is out and stored properly in the storage pocket. 3-17[...]

  • Page 132

    Reinstalling the Rear Glass T o reinstall the rear glass, do the following: 1. Squeeze and pull down the latch levers (A), located near the upper corners of the rear glass, to unlatch. 2. Hold the rear glass in place with one hand and turn the glass lock knobs, located at both top corners of the glass storage pocket, to the unlocked position. 3. Pull the rear glass out from the storage pocket using the grab handles. 4. With the rear glass tilted at an angle, place the bottom edge in the lower channel of the window frame. 3-18[...]

  • Page 133

    Be sure to align the rear glass side-to-side using the alignment arrows (G). 5. Apply a firm downward pressure and then push the rear glass flat against the window frame. Use the grab handles at the top of the rear glass to assist you. 6. Push the rear glass flat against the window frame and push each latch lever up until it locks. Y ou should hear a click when each latch lever locks correctly . 3-19[...]

  • Page 134

    Lowering the Midgate ® with the Rear Glass in Place The Midgate ® can be lowered to allow the cargo area of your vehicle to extend into the cab. The rear glass can be either installed in its normal position, or it can be removed and stored in the rear glass storage pocket. T o lower the Midgate ® , do the following: 1. Fold the rear seats. The front seats might have to be moved forward slightly to allow the rear seats to fold. See Rear Seat Operation on page 2 ‑ 13 for more information. Rear Glass in Normal Position 2. Standing outside of the vehicle, hold the Midgate ® securely so it does not fall forward. T urn the Midgate ® handle clockwise and pull the Midgate ® toward you. 3-20[...]

  • Page 135

    3. Lower the Midgate ® until it is flat. Lowering the Midgate ® with the Rear Glass in the Storage Pocket Rear Glass Stored in Glass Storage Pocket 3-21[...]

  • Page 136

    Midgate ® Lowered with Crossbar Attached This procedure works the same as the procedure described previously , but when you lower the Midgate ® with the rear glass in the stored position, you will notice that the entire crossbar will lower with the Midgate ® . This is completely normal; however , since the crossbar lowers with the Midgate ® , it will be heavier . As you lower the Midgate ® be ready for the extra weight and do not let the Midgate ® fall as you lower it. Raising the Midgate ® T o return the Midgate ® to its normal position, raise the Midgate ® up with a firm swinging motion until it latches into place securely . This will help to ensure that the Midgate ® closes with[...]

  • Page 137

    W ARNING: (Continued) Do not allow people to ride on the tailgate. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly . Use the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or power door lock switch to lock and unlock the tailgate. Open the tailgate by lifting up on its handle while pulling the tailgate toward you. T o shut the tailgate, push it firmly upward until it latches. Push and pull on the tailgate to be sure it is latched securely . T ailgate Removal The tailgate is not to be removed. This may cause damage to electrical connector resulting in loss of lock/unlock and rear vision camera function. Power Assist Steps Y our vehicle may have power assist steps. The p[...]

  • Page 138

    Windows { W ARNING: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 3-24[...]

  • Page 139

    Power Windows { W ARNING: Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window . Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. Driver's Side shown The power window controls are located on each of the side doors. The driver's door also has switches that control the passenger and rear wind[...]

  • Page 140

    Express-Down Windows Windows with an express ‐ down feature allow the windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully on the window switch, then release, to activate the express ‐ down mode. The express ‐ down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the front edge of the switch. Window Lockout o (Window Lockout) : The window lockout switch is located with the power window switches on the driver's door armrest. This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating, except from the driver's position. Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on. Sun Visors Sun Vis[...]

  • Page 141

    Theft-Deterrent Systems V ehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they do not make it impossible to steal. Content Theft-Deterrent Y our vehicle has a content theft-deterrent alarm system. This is the security light. T o arm the theft-deterrent system: 1. Open the door . 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the power door lock switch. The security light will come on to inform the driver the system is arming. If a door is open when the doors are locked, the security light will flash. If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the theft ‐ deterrent system will not start the arming process un[...]

  • Page 142

    If a locked driver door is opened without using the RKE transmitter , a ten second pre-alarm will occur . The horn will chirp and the lights will flash. If the key is not placed in the ignition and turned to ST ART or the door is not unlocked by pressing the unlock button on the RKE transmitter during the ten second pre-alarm, the alarm will go off. Y our vehicle's headlamps will flash and the horn will sound for about 30 seconds, then will turn off to save the battery power . The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle's key or the manual door lock. It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with the door open or the RKE trans[...]

  • Page 143

    P ASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and RSS-210/21 1 of Industry and Science Canada. P ASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer Operation Y our vehicle has P ASS-Key ® III+ (Personalized Automotive Security System) theft-deterrent system. P ASS-Key ® III+ is a passive theft-deterrent system. The system is automatically armed when the key is removed from the ignition. The system is automatically disarmed when the key is turned to ON/RUN, ACC/ACCESSORY or ST ART from the LOCK/OFF position. Y ou do not have to manually arm or disarm the system. The security [...]

  • Page 144

    It is possible for the P ASS-Key ® III+ decoder to learn the transponder value of a new or replacement key . Up to 10 keys may be programmed for the vehicle. The following procedure is for programming additional keys only . If all the currently programmed keys are lost or do not operate, you must see your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service P ASS-Key ® III+ to have keys made and programmed to the system. See your dealer/retailer or a locksmith who can service P ASS-Key ® III+ to get a new key blank that is cut exactly as the ignition key that operates the system. T o program the new additional key: 1. V erify that the new key has a 1 stamped on it. 2. Insert the original, alrea[...]

  • Page 145

    Starting and Operating Y our V ehicle New V ehicle Break-In Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: . Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). . Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow , for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. A void downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. . A void making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time yo[...]

  • Page 146

    Ignition Positions The ignition switch has four different positions. T o shift out of P (Park), the ignition must be in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal must be applied. A (LOCK/OFF) : This position locks the ignition. It also locks the transmission on automatic transmission vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF . On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF . The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center . If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY . If this doesn't work, then the vehicle needs service. Notice: Using a to[...]

  • Page 147

    C (ON/RUN) : This position can be used to operate the electrical accessories and to display some instrument panel cluster warning and indicator lights. The swi tch stays in this position when the engine is running. The transmission is also unlocked in this position on automatic transmission vehicles. If you leave the key in the ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN position with the engine off, the battery could be drained. Y ou may not be able to start the vehicle if the battery is allowed to drain for an extended period of time. D (ST ART) : This is the position that starts the engine. When the engine starts, release the key . The ignition switch returns to ON/RUN for driving. A warning tone will sound [...]

  • Page 148

    Starting the Engine Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any other position. T o restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only . Notice: Do not try to shift to P (Park) if the vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage the transmission. Shift to P (Park) only when the vehicle is stopped. Starting Procedure 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition to ST ART . When the engine starts, let go of the key . The idle speed will slow down as the engine warms. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all movi[...]

  • Page 149

    2. If the engine does not start after 5 ‐ 10 seconds, especially in very cold weather (below 0°F or − 18°C), it could be flooded with too much gasoline. T ry pushing the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and holding it there as you hold the key in ST ART for up to a maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least 15 seconds between each try , to allow the cranking motor to cool down. When the engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator . If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again, repeat these steps. This clears the extra gasoline from the engine. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently until the oil warms up and lubri[...]

  • Page 150

    The vehicle may have a memory function which lets pedal settings be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information. Engine Coolant Heater The engine coolant heater can provide easier starting and better fuel economy during engine warm-up in cold weather conditions at or below − 18°C (0°F). Vehicles with an engine heater should be plugged in at least four hours before starting. An internal thermostat in the plug-end of the cord may exist which will prevent engine coolant heater operation at temperatures above − 18°C (0°F). T o Use the Engine Coolant Heater 1. T urn off the engine. 2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord. The cord [...]

  • Page 151

    Active Fuel Management ™ V ehicles with V8 engines may have Active Fuel Management ™ . This system allows the engine to operate on either all or half of its cylinders, depending on the driving conditions. When less power is required, such as cruising at a constant vehicle speed, the system will operate in the half cylinder mode, allowing the vehicle to achieve better fuel economy . When greater power demands are required, such as accelerating from a stop, passing, or merging onto a freeway , the system will maintain full-cylinder operation. If the vehicle has an Active Fuel Management ™ indicator , see DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 43 or DIC Operation and [...]

  • Page 152

    When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you may notice an increase in the effort to shift out of P (Park). See T orque Lock (Automatic T ransmission) under Shifting Into Park on page 3 ‑ 51 for more information. { W ARNING: It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly . Y ou or others could be injured. T o be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift[...]

  • Page 153

    N (Neutral) : In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. T o restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only . Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. { W ARNING: Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly . Y ou could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Be sure[...]

  • Page 154

    M (Manual Mode) : This position lets drivers select the range of gears appropriate for current driving conditions. See Range Selection Mode later in this section. Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal may damage the transmission. The repair will not be covered by the vehicle warranty . If you are stuck, do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use the brakes to hold the vehicle in place. The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine, before[...]

  • Page 155

    Range Selection Mode On vehicles with a Range Selection Mode, this feature may be used to control the vehicle's transmission. T o use this feature, do the following: 1. Move the shift lever to the M (Manual Mode). 2. Press the plus/minus button, to upshift or downshift selecting the desired range of gears for current driving conditions. When in M (Manual Mode) a number displays next to the M, indicating the current gear that has been selected. The number displayed in the gear indicator is the highest gear that can be used. However , the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means that all gears below that number are available. When 5 (F[...]

  • Page 156

    T ow/Haul Mode The vehicle has a tow/haul mode. The tow/haul mode adjusts the transmission shift pattern to reduce shift cycling, providing increased performance, vehicle control, and transmission cooling while towing or hauling heavy loads. Press the button located on the end of the shift lever to turn the tow/haul on or off. While the tow/haul is on, a light on the instrument panel cluster comes on. See T ow/Haul Mode Light on page 4 ‑ 41 for more information. Also see “ T ow Haul Mode ” under T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 47 for more information. Grade Braking The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever . While in Ra[...]

  • Page 157

    Cruise Grade Braking Cruise Grade Braking assists when driving on a downhill grade. It maintains vehicle speed by automatically implementing a shift schedule that uses the engine and the transmission to slow the vehicle. Cruise Grade Braking operates while Cruise Control is engaged in T ow/Haul mode to assist in maintaining vehicle speed under loaded vehicle conditions. It utilizes vehicle acceleration and deviation from desired speed to determine the correct gear for the operating condition. If vehicle speed is above the desired speed the transmission will downshift to slow the vehicle. If vehicle speed is near or below desired speed the trans will upshift, allowing vehicle speed to increas[...]

  • Page 158

    Front Axle The front axle engages and disengages automatically when you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle to engage or disengage is normal. Automatic T ransfer Case The transfer case knob is located to the left of the instrument panel cluster . Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. Y ou can choose among five driving settings: Indicator lights in the switches show you which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. It will stay on[...]

  • Page 159

    4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-wheel high position when you need extra traction, such as on snowy or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting also engages your front axle to help drive the vehicle. This is the best setting to use when plowing snow . 4 n (Four-Wheel Drive Low) : This setting also engages the front axle and delivers extra torque. Y ou may never need this setting. It sends maximum power to all four wheels. Y ou might choose Four-Wheel Drive Low if you are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow , and while climbing or descending steep hills. The vehicle has StabiliTrak ® . Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn T raction Control and St[...]

  • Page 160

    Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed should be kept below 45 mph (72 km/h). Extended high-speed operation in 4L may damage or shorten the life of the drivetrain. T o shift to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position, the ignition must be in ON/RUN and the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral). The preferred method for shifting into Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have the vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive Low position. Y ou must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear . No[...]

  • Page 161

    The vehicle may have significant engagement noise and bump when shifting between Four-Wheel Drive Low and Four-Wheel Drive High ranges or from N (Neutral) while the engine is running. If the knob is turned to the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or T wo-Wheel Drive High switch position when the vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO or T wo-Wheel Drive High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not complete the shift unless the vehicle is moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in N (Neutral). Shifting into Neutral T o shift the transfer case to N (Neutral) do the following: 1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will not roll. 2. Se[...]

  • Page 162

    Shifting Out of Neutral T o shift out of N Neutral do the following: 1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal. 2. T urn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off, and shift the transmission to N (Neutral). 3. T urn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer case shift position (T wo-Wheel Drive High, Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO). After the transfer case has shifted out of N (Neutral), the N (Neutral) light will go out. 4. Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle. Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four-Wheel Drive Low indicator light has stopped flashing could damage the transfer case. T o help avoid damaging the vehicle, always wait fo[...]

  • Page 163

    Automatic T ransfer Case The transfer case knob is located to the left of the instrument panel cluster . Use this dial to shift into and out of four-wheel drive. The vehicle has Four-Wheel-Drive with StabiliTrak ® . For information on StabiliTrak ® , see StabiliT rak ® System on page 5 ‑ 6 . Y ou can choose among three driving settings: Indicator lights in the switch show you which setting you are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when you turn on the ignition and the last chosen setting will stay on. If the lights do not come on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. An indicator light will flash while shifting. It will stay on when the shift is c[...]

  • Page 164

    Service Four Wheel Drive If the SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message stays on, you should take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer for service. See “ SERVICE 4 WHEEL DRIVE message ” under DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 57 . Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) T urn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO position. This can be done at any speed. The indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed. Shifting Into T wo-Wheel Drive High T urn the knob to the T wo-Wheel High position. This can be done at any speed. The indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed. Excessi[...]

  • Page 165

    T o release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If the parking brake is not released when you begin to drive, the brake system warning light will flash and a chime will sound warning you that the parking brake is still on. If you are towing a trailer and are parking on a hill, see T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 47 . Shifting Into Park { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehi[...]

  • Page 166

    Leaving the V ehicle With the Engine Running { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. Y ou or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine runni[...]

  • Page 167

    Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to: . Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and . Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery . If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery . See Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 40 for more information. T o shift ou[...]

  • Page 168

    Engine Exhaust { W ARNING: Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: . The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). . The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. . The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) . The vehicle ’ s exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. . There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after-market modifications that are not completely sealed. If unusual fume[...]

  • Page 169

    Running the V ehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know . { W ARNING: Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust on page 3 ‑ 54 . { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can ro[...]

  • Page 170

    Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use. Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror . V ehicles with OnStar ® have three additional control buttons located at the bottom of the mirror . See your dealer/retailer for more information about OnStar ® and how to subscribe to it. See the OnStar ® owner guide for more information about the services OnStar ® provides. O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off. T[...]

  • Page 171

    Outside Power Mirrors V ehicles with outside power mirrors have controls located on the driver door . T o adjust each mirror: 1. Press (A) or (B) to select the driver or passenger side mirror . 2. Press one of the four arrows located on the control pad to adjust the mirror . 3. Adjust the outside mirror so that the side of the vehicle and the area behind are seen. 4. Press either (A) or (B) again to deselect the mirror. Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. T o fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position. Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors V ehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors[...]

  • Page 172

    Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: . The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding. . They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. . The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position. . The mirrors vibrate at normal driving speeds. Fold and unfold the mirrors one time using the mirror controls to reset them to their normal position. A popping noise may be heard during the resetting of the power foldaway mirrors. This sound is normal after a manual folding operation. Automatic Dimming The driver outside mirror adjusts for the glare of the headlamps behind you. See Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror on page 3 ‑ 56 for more information. T urn [...]

  • Page 173

    Outside Heated Mirrors < (Rear Window Defogger): Press to heat the mirrors. See “ Rear Window Defogger ” under Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 4 ‑ 19 for more information. Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URP A) For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URP A) system, it operates at speeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph), and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 2.5 m (8 ft) behind the vehicle, and at least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground. { W ARNING: The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URP A) system does not replace driver[...]

  • Page 174

    How the System Works URP A comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). A single tone sounds to indicate the system is working. URP A operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). An obstacle is indicated by audible beeps. The interval between the beeps becomes shorter as the vehicle gets closer to the obstacle. When the distance is less than 30 cm (12 in) the beeps are continuous. T o be detected, objects must be at least 25.4 cm (10 in) off the ground and below tailgate level. Objects must also be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from the rear bumper . This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather . The system can be disabled by pressing the rear park aid disabl[...]

  • Page 175

    When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URP A system will not activate due to a temporary condition, the messages P ARK ASSIST OFF or P ARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL will be displayed on the DIC. SERVICE P ARK ASSIST : If this message occurs, take the vehicle to your dealer/retailer to repair the system. P ARK ASSIST OFF : This message occurs if the driver disables the system. P ARK ASST BLOCKED SEE OWNERS MANUAL : This message can occur under the following conditions: . The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the vehicle's rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow , ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Y our V ehicle on page 6 ‑ 99 . . The park assist[...]

  • Page 176

    Rear Vision Camera (RVC) This vehicle may have a Rear Vision Camera system. Read this entire section before using it. { W ARNING: The Rear Vision Camera (RVC) system does not replace driver vision. RVC does not: . Detect objects that are outside the camera's field of view , below the bumper , or underneath the vehicle. . Detect children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. Do not back the vehicle by only looking at the RVC screen, or use the screen during longer , higher speed backing maneuvers or where there could be cross-traffic. Y our judged distances using the screen will differ from actual distances. So if you do not use proper care before backing up, you could hit a vehicle, child,[...]

  • Page 177

    V ehicles With Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on the navigation screen. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the navigation screen will go back to the last screen that had been displayed, after a delay . T urning the Rear V ision Camera System On or Off T o turn the rear vision camera system on or off: 1. Shift into P (Park). 2. Press the MENU button to enter the configure menu options, then press the MENU hard key to select Display or touch the Display screen button. 3. Select the[...]

  • Page 178

    Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen T o adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, press the MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display . Any adjustments made will only affect the rear vision camera screen. ] (Brightness) : T ouch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the brightness of the screen. _ (Contrast) : T ouch the + (plus) or – (minus) screen buttons to increase or decrease the contrast of the screen. Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URP A) system must not be disable[...]

  • Page 179

    Rear Vision Camera Location The image is provided by the camera located under the liftgate handle. The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited. The camera does not display objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper . The area displayed on the screen can vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions. The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides. A. View displayed by the camera. B. Corner of the rear bumper . 3-65[...]

  • Page 180

    When the System Does Not Seem T o Work Properly The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if: . The RVC is turned off. See “ Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off ” earlier in this section. . It is dark. . The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. . Ice, snow , mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth. . The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer/retailer . The rear v[...]

  • Page 181

    Universal Home Remote System See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and RSS-210/21 1 of Industry and Science Canada. Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below . This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. Do not use this system with any garage door opene[...]

  • Page 182

    Programming Universal Home Remote — Rolling Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to learcar2u.com. Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units. Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated. T o program up to three devices: 1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, and immediately release them. 2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “ Learn ” or “ Smart ” [...]

  • Page 183

    3. Immediately return to the vehicle. Press and hold the Universal Home Remote button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light, above the selected button, should slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up to 20 seconds. 4. Immediately , within one second, release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 5. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. T o program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener , a security device, or home automation device, repeat[...]

  • Page 184

    T o program up to three devices: 1. T o verify that the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit, remove the battery cover on the hand held transmitter supplied by the manufacturer of the garage door opener motor . If there are a row of dip switches similar to the graphic above, the garage door opener is a Fixed Code unit. If you do not see a row of dip switches, return to the previous section for Programming Universal Home Remote – Rolling Code. Y our hand held transmitter can have between eight to 12 dip switches depending on the brand of transmitter . The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit) could also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Ho[...]

  • Page 185

    Example of Eight Dip Switches with T wo Positions Example of Eight Dip Switches with Three Positions The panel of switches might not appear exactly as they do in the examples above, but they should be similar . The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter could be labeled, as follows: . A switch in the up position could be labeled as “ Up, ” “ +, ” or “ On. ” . A switch in the down position could be labeled as “ Down, ” “ − , ” or “ Off. ” . A switch in the middle position could be labeled as “ Middle, ” “ 0, ” or “ Neutral. ” 3-71[...]

  • Page 186

    2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows: . When a switch is in the up position, write “ Left. ” . When a switch is in the down position, write “ Right. ” . If a switch is set between the up and down position, write “ Middle. ” The switch settings written down in Step 2 now become the button strokes to be entered into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into the Universal Home Remote, when completing Step 4. 3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds. Release the buttons to put the Universal H[...]

  • Page 187

    5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time. The indicator lights will turn on. 6. Press and hold the button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up to 55 seconds. 7. Immediately release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 8. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. T o program another Fixed Code device such as an additional garag[...]

  • Page 188

    Storage Areas Glove Box Lift up on the glove box lever to open it. Cupholders For vehicles with cupholders for front and rear passengers, the cupholders are located in the center console and on the back of the center console. Press down and release the access door to open and use the front cupholders. Pull down on the door located on the back of the console to use the rear cupholders. Push on the door to close it. Push down and then back to remove the front cupholder for cleaning. For vehicles with a rear armrest/cupholder , it can be used by the reat seat passengers. Pull up and then out on the tab, located at the top center of the armrest. Then pull the armrest down to access the cupholder[...]

  • Page 189

    Roof Rack System { W ARNING: If something is carried on top of the vehicle that is longer or wider than the roof rack — like paneling, plywood, or a mattress — the wind can catch it while the vehicle is being driven. The item being carried could be violently torn off, and this could cause a collision, and damage the vehicle. Never carry something longer or wider than the roof rack on top of the vehicle unless using a GM Certified accessory carrier . For vehicles with a roof rack, the rack can be used to load items. For roof racks that do not have crossrails included, GM Certified crossrails can be purchased as an accessory . See your dealer/retailer for additional information. Notice: Lo[...]

  • Page 190

    Do not exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when loading the vehicle. For more information on vehicle capacity and loading, see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 . . If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the crossrails and siderails to spread the load. Tie the plywood to the siderail supports. . T ie the load and secure it to the crossrails or the siderail supports. Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding. T o move a crossrail, lift the release lever up, on both sides of the rail. Then slide the crossrail to the desired position balancing the force side to side. Press the release lever down on both sides of the rail, down[...]

  • Page 191

    T o remove a cargo panel(s): 1. Lower the tailgate. See T ailgate on page 3 ‑ 22 for more information on the tailgate. The panels are embossed on the upper center portion with the numbers 1, 2 and 3. There are also numbered labels on the bottom of the panels. The numbers on the top and bottom of the panels will be used as reference when removing, storing and reinstalling the panels. 2. Unlock the cargo panel 3 by pulling forward on the driver side and passenger side cargo panel latches, located on the bottom of each cargo panel. 3. Remove cargo panel 2 in the same way and set it aside. Remove as many cargo panels as needed. 4. T o remove cargo panel 1, unlock the two rear latches, lift the[...]

  • Page 192

    After each cargo panel has been removed, store them within the cargo storage area using the cargo panel storage system. Cargo Panel Storage System The three cargo panels can be stored in the cargo area using the storage strap system. Always use the storage strap system to store the cargo panels while driving. T o store the panels: 1. Secure the storage strap system in the cargo storage area by attaching the six clips included on the cargo strap system to the tie down locations on either side of the storage area. Before storing the cargo panels, make sure that the latches on the cargo panels are in the locked position. The latches are locked when they are parallel to the front and back edge o[...]

  • Page 193

    Use the following instructions for the proper storage sequence and location for each panel: A. Secure clip A on the storage strap. B. Secure clip B on the storage strap. C. Place the remaining primary straps on top of the lid and tray at the top of the cargo area. 2. Starting with cargo panel 1, load the cargo panel with the latches facing up toward the side of the cargo box. Do the same for cargo panel 2 then panel 3. Make sure to store panel 2 with the latches facing down and panel 3 with latches facing up toward the side of the cargo box. 3-79[...]

  • Page 194

    3. Place the primary straps over the three cargo covers (A). Fasten the four strap clips (B). 4. T ighten all straps by pulling on the free end of each strap. 3-80[...]

  • Page 195

    5. Close both cross locks at the center of the strap system to tightly secure. Panels 3, 2, 1 Loaded 3-81[...]

  • Page 196

    Reinstalling the Cargo Cover Panels The strap system can remain attached to the side of the cargo area while it is not in use, or it can be stored inside the top box storage compartment. See T op-Box Storage on page 3 ‑ 91 for more information. T o reinstall a cargo panel: 1. Starting with cargo panel 1, place the latches in the unlocked position. Place cargo panel 1 on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up. Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar Place the cover on the cargo box within 4 inches of the Midgate ® and lower the rear of the panel within 2 to 3 inches from the top of the cargo box. Push the cover forward making sure that the guide block engages t[...]

  • Page 197

    2. The driver side cargo cover panel latch must lock in place before the passenger side latch can be locked. If this procedure is not followed exactly , the cargo cover panels might not correctly lock in place. Push the driver side latch toward the front of the vehicle to lock the cover in position. A click sounds when each latch locks. Lock the remaining passenger side latch on panel 1. 3. Install cargo cover 2 followed by 3 next. Place the latches in the unlocked position. Place the cargo cover panel on the cargo area rails while holding the back of the cargo panel up. 3-83[...]

  • Page 198

    Driver Side Shown, Passenger Side Similar Push the panel forward until it is snug against the other panel and then let the back of the panel down making sure that the pegs (A) align with the receivers (B). 4. Push the latches toward the front of the vehicle, starting with the driver side latch, to lock the panel in place. A click sounds when each latch locks correctly . Folding and Storage of Straps Fold the straps for storing inside the top box storage compartment: 1. Extend the six strap ends on a flat surface. 3-84[...]

  • Page 199

    2. Fold the four primary strap ends toward the center as shown. 3. T ake the short strap and wrap it around the folded webbing, forming a package. 3-85[...]

  • Page 200

    4. T ake the storage strap and wrap it around the package. Finally , attach the hooks to the webbing and place the straps inside the top box storage compartment. Cargo Tie Downs The vehicle has cargo tie downs, located in the rear cargo area. These can be used to secure cargo. The tie downs can also be used to secure the cargo cover panel strap system, if the vehicle has one. For more information see “ Cargo Cover Panels ” earlier in this section . All-Weather Cargo Area The vehicle's cargo area can be used in many differe nt configurations – cargo panels on or off, Midgate ® up or down, rear glass in or out. It has features that resist the elements and protect cargo. It is desig[...]

  • Page 201

    Even when all of these things are working properly and the cover system is on, there may be some instances (heavy rains, automated car washes, etc.) when water can collect the following areas: A. T op drain grates B. Removable front drain grate (Midgate ® drain gate) C. Side rail channels and catch cups D. Front drains E. W ater drainage area around both sides of the box and the tailgate side F . Rear drains G. Cargo floor H. Cargo mat Maintenance and Cleaning T o ensure that the water management system performs properly , be sure that the Midgate ® , tailgate and cover system are fully closed and that all parts are clean and not blocked with debris. Follow the instructions given next in t[...]

  • Page 202

    T op Drain Grates – Removal and Cleaning The top drain grates are located near the rear window on both sides of the vehicle. Clean the grates and drains if there is a blockage. T o remove each drain grate, do the following: 1. Remove the cargo panels. See Cargo Cover Panels on page 3 ‑ 76 for more information. 2. Grasp the edges of the grate and pull it out from the vehicle. Flush the drain with clean water . 3-88[...]

  • Page 203

    T o replace the drain grate: 1. Line up the clips on the vehicle with the slots in the grate and firmly push the grate down. Do not force the grate. If it does not clip into place, realign the clips with the holes and try again. Side Rail Channels The side rail channels are located on top of both sides of the cargo area. Flush them out with clean water if debris collects inside of them. Carefully load cargo into the cargo area, so that the rails do not get damaged. 3-89[...]

  • Page 204

    Midgate ® Drain Grate Removal and Cleaning The removable Midgate drain grate is located near the base of the Midgate. After hauling dirt, wood chips, pebbles etc. the Midgate drain should be flushed with water . First remove the drain grate: 1. Lower the Midgate ® . See Midgate ® on page 3 ‑ 13 for more information. 2. Pull up on the rear side of the drain grate, tilt it toward the front of the vehicle, and pull it out. Reverse the procedure to reinstall the drain grate. 3-90[...]

  • Page 205

    Cargo Area Floor Drains The cargo net has cut outs for the four cargo-area floor drains located under the cargo mat near the sides of the cargo area. Periodically flush the drains through the cut outs to clear debris and allow water to drain from the cargo area. If the cargo area is extremely dirty lift up the edges of the cargo floor mat or take the whole mat out and flush the drains with water . T op-Box Storage The vehicle has top-box storage units on both sides of the vehicle. The passenger side top box contains the tools needed to change a flat tire. Use the key to unlock or lock it. Press the key cylinder button and swing the lid open. Turn on the cargo lamps, if the vehicle has them, [...]

  • Page 206

    Sunroof Y our vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding sunroof. T o open or close the sunroof, the ignition needs to be turned to ON/RUN, or Retained Accessory Power (RAP) must be active. When RAP is active, the sunroof will work for 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off, or until a front door is opened. See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 3 ‑ 33 for more information. There are two switches in the overhead console that operate the sunroof. Manual-Open/Manual-Close : T o open the sunroof press and hold the rear of the driver's side switch until the sunroof reaches the desired position. T o close the sunroof, press and hold the front of the driver's side switch unt[...]

  • Page 207

    Express-Open/Express-Close : T o express-open the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver's side switch. The sunroof will open automatically . T o stop the sunroof partway , press the switch a second time. T o express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the front of the driver's side switch. The sunroof will close automatically . T o stop the sunroof partway , press the switch a second time. The sunshade will open automatically with the sunroof, but can also be opened manually . The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver's side switch [...]

  • Page 208

    2 NOTES 3-94[...]

  • Page 209

    Section 4 Instrument Panel Instrument Panel Overview ............... ......... 4-3 Hazard W arning Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 T ilt Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 T urn Signal/Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 T urn and Lane-Change Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 210

    Section 4 Instrument Panel T ow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Fuel Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Low Fuel W arning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Driver Information Center (DIC) .................. 4-43 DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC B u t t o n s ) ..... ............................... . 4 - 4 3 DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC B u t t o n s ) ..... ............................... . 4 - 5 1 DIC Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 DIC V ehicle Cus[...]

  • Page 211

    Instrument Panel Overview Hazard W arning Flashers | (Hazard W arning Flasher): Press this button located on top of the steering column, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle's turn signals will not work. Horn T o sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering wheel. Tilt Wheel The tilt lever is located on the lower left side of the steering column. T o adjust the steering wheel: 1. Hold the steering wheel and pull the lever . 2. Move the steering wheel to a comfortable position. 3. Release the lever to lock the wheel in[...]

  • Page 212

    T urn Signal/Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: G : T urn and Lane Change Signals 5 3 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer N : Windshield Wipers L : Windshield W asher Flash-to-Pass. Exterior Lamps. Information for these features is on the pages following. T urn and Lane-Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. The turn signals automatically flash three times. It will flash six times if the tow-haul mode is active. Holding the turn sig[...]

  • Page 213

    T urn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime sounds at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON also appears in the DIC. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 57 . T o turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the off position. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer) : T o change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the lever toward the instrument panel. T o return to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever toward you. Then release it. When the high beams are on, this indicator light on the instrument panel cluster is also on. Flash-to-Pass Use your high[...]

  • Page 214

    Windshield Wipers T urn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers. 8 (Mist): Single wipe, turn to 8 , then release. Several wipes, hold the band on 8 longer . 9 (Off): Turns the windshield wipers of f. 6 (Adjustable Interval Wipes): T urn the band up for more frequent wipes or down for less frequent wipes. 6 (Low Speed): Slow wipes. ? (High Speed): Fast wipes. Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If frozen to the windshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades should be replaced. See Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 6 ‑ 53 . Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor . A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it [...]

  • Page 215

    Cruise Control { W ARNING: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traffic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. With cruise control, a speed of about 40 km/h (25 mph) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator . Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 40 km/h (25 mph). When the brakes are applied, the cruise control turns off. If your vehicle has the Stabilitrak ® system and begins to lim[...]

  • Page 216

    Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low . The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster will come on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. { W ARNING: If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. Y ou could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. 1. Press T . 2. Get up to the desired speed. 3. Press the SET − button located on the steering wheel and release it. 4. T ake your foot off the accelerator . Resuming a [...]

  • Page 217

    Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control T o reduce your speed while using cruise control: . Press and hold the SET – button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it. . T o slow down in small amounts, press the SET – button on the steering wheel briefly . Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower . Passing Another V ehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicles speed, load, an[...]

  • Page 218

    Exterior Lamps The exterior lamps control is located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel. It controls the following systems: . Headlamps . T aillamps . Parking Lamps . License Plate Lamps . Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions: 9 (Off): Turns off the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL). Turn the headlamp control to the off position again to turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only work when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park). AUTO (Automatic) : Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness, together with the following: . Parking Lamps . Instru[...]

  • Page 219

    When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is on, the headlamps turn off automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned off. When the headlamps are turned on while the vehicle is off, the headlamps will stay on for 10 minutes before automatically turning off to prevent the battery from being drained. Turn the headlamp control to off and then back to the headlamp on position to make the headlamps stay on for an additional 10 minutes. Push the turn signal/multifunction lever toward the instrument panel to change the headlamps from low beam to high beam. Headlamps on Reminder If a door is open, a reminder chime sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are manually turned on and[...]

  • Page 220

    Automatic Headlamp System When it is dark enough outside and the headlamp switch is in AUTO, the automatic headlamp system turns on the headlamps along with other lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker , parking lamps, roof marker lamps, and the instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim. T o turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the exterior lamps switch to the off position and then release. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the transmission must be in the P (Park) position, before the automatic headlamp system can be turned off. The vehicle has a light sensor located on the top of the instrument panel. Do not cover this sensor or the system will come on whenever th[...]

  • Page 221

    Fog Lamps If your vehicle has fog lamps you can use them for better vision in foggy or misty conditions. Y our parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must be on for your fog lamps to work. The fog lamp button is located on the left side of your instrument panel. # (Fog Lamps): Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. An indicator light will glow near the button when the fog lamps are on. Press the button again to turn them off. Remember , fog lamps alone will not give off as much light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps in the dark without turning on the headlamps. The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the fog lamps will [...]

  • Page 222

    Dome Lamps The dome lamps come on when any door is opened. They turn off after all the doors are closed. The dome lamps can also be turned on by turning the instrument panel brightness knob, located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column, clockwise to the farthest position. In this position, the dome lamps remain on whether a door is opened or closed. Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control. k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened. Entry/Exit Lighting The vehi[...]

  • Page 223

    A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger , climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery . It does this by balancing the generator's output and the vehicle's electrical needs. It can increase engine idle speed to generate more power , whenever needed. It can temporarily reduce the power demands of some accessories. Normally , these actions occur in steps or levels, without being noticeable. In rare cases at the highest levels of corrective action, this[...]

  • Page 224

    Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter For vehicles with an ashtray it is located in the center console or on the instrument panel. Pull up on the ashtray door to open it if it is in the console or pull the door open it if it is on the instrument panel. Notice: If papers, pins, or other flammable items are put in the ashtray , hot cigarettes or other smoking materials could ignite them and possibly damage the vehicle. Never put flammable items in the ashtray . T o remove the ashtray , pull it out from the console or from the slide out door . T o reinstall the ashtray , slide it back to the original position. T o use the cigarette lighter , if the vehicle has one, push it in all the way , and let g[...]

  • Page 225

    9 (Fan Control): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. T urn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off. Air Delivery Mode Control : Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to change the direction of the airflow inside the vehicle. The knob can be positioned between two modes, for a combination of those modes. T o change the current mode, select one of the following: H (V ent): Air is directed to the instrument panel outlets. ) (Bi-Level): Air is divided between the instrument panel and floor outlets. Some air is directed towards the windshield and side window outlets. Cooler air is directed to the upper outlets and warmer air to the flo[...]

  • Page 226

    : (Outside Air): Press to turn the outside air mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that outside air is on. Air from outside the vehicle is circulated throughout the vehicle. The outside air mode can be used with all modes, but it cannot be used with the recirculation mode. Pressing this button again will cancel the recirculation mode. ? (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation mode on or off. An indicator light comes on to show that recirculation is on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor , defrost, or defog[...]

  • Page 227

    Dual Automatic Climate Control System The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system. The vehicle also has a flow-through ventilation system described later in this section. A. Driver and Passenger T emperature Controls B. Fan Control C. AUTO D. Defrost E. Recirculation F . Outside Air G. Air Delivery Mode Control H. Display I. Power Button J. Rear Window Defogger K. Air Conditioning L. P ASS O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed to the floor . This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent or bi-level m[...]

  • Page 228

    Driver and Passenger Side T emperature Controls The driver and passenger side temperature buttons are used to adjust the temperature of the air coming through the system on the driver or passenger's side of the vehicle. The temperature can be adjusted even if the system is turned off. This is possible since outside air always flows through the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode. See “ Recirculation ” later in this section. Press the + or − buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature. The driver side or passenger side temperature display shows the temperature setting decreasing or increasing. The passenger side temperature setti[...]

  • Page 229

    2. Set the driver and passenger temperature. T o find your comfort setting, start with a 23°C (74°F) temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes for the system to regulate. Use the driver or passenger temperature buttons to adjust the temperature setting as necessary . If a temperature setting of 15°C (60°F) is chosen, the system remains at the maximum cooling setting. If a temperature setting of 32°C (90°F) is chosen, the system remains at the maximum heat setting. Choosing either maximum setting will not cause the vehicle to heat or cool any faster . Do not cover the solar sensor located on the top of the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor regulates air temperature [...]

  • Page 230

    6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outlets, with some to the windshield, side window outlets, and second row floor outlets. In this mode, the system automatically selects outside air . - (Defog): This mode clears the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. In this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. 0 (Defrost): This mode removes fog or frost from the windshield more quickly . Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents, with some directed to the flo[...]

  • Page 231

    @ (Recirculation): Press to turn the recirculation mode on. An indicator light comes on to show that the recirculation is on. This mode recirculates and helps to quickly cool the air inside the vehicle. It can be used to help prevent outside air and odors from entering the vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be used with floor , defog, or defrost modes. If recirculation is selected with one of those modes, the indicator light flashes three times and then turns off. The air conditioning compressor also comes on when this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode the windows may fog when the weather is cold and damp. T o clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost mode and increa[...]

  • Page 232

    Sensors The solar sensor , located in the defrost grille, middle of the instrument panel, monitors the solar heat. Do not cover the solar sensor or the system will not work properly . There is also an interior temperature sensor located next to the steering wheel that measures the temperature of the air inside your vehicle. There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting[...]

  • Page 233

    Outlet Adjustment Y our vehicle has air outlets located in the center and on the side of your instrument panel that allow you to adjust the direction and amount of airflow inside the vehicle. Move the louvers up or down. Use the thumbwheel next to or underneath the outlet to close the louvers. For the most efficient airflow and temperature control, keep the outlet in the fully opened position. Operation Tips . Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow , or any other obstruction, such as leaves. The heater and defroster will work far better , reducing the chance of fogging the inside of your windows. . Keep the air path under the front seats clear of objects. This helps air to circ[...]

  • Page 234

    Instrument Panel Cluster United States version shown. Canada similar 4-26[...]

  • Page 235

    Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle's speed in both kilometers per hour (km/h) and miles per hour (mph). The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either kilometers (used in Canada) or miles (used in the United States). T rip Odometer The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero. Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel cluster next to the trip odometer display , to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer . Holding the reset button for approximately one second while the trip odometer is displayed resets it. T o display the odometer reading with the igni[...]

  • Page 236

    Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light For vehicles equipped with the passenger safety belt reminder light, several seconds after the engine is started, a chime sounds for several seconds to remind the front passenger to buckle their safety belt. The passenger safety belt light, located on the overhead console, comes on and stays on for several seconds, flashes for several more seconds and then comes on solid for several more. This chime and light sequence is repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object [...]

  • Page 237

    If there is a problem with the airbag system, an airbag Driver Information Center (DIC) message can also come on. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 57 for more information. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator If the vehicle has the airbag status indicator pictured in the following illustration, then the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator is on the overhead console. See Passenger Sensing System on page 2 ‑ 71 for important safety information. In addition, if the vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position, the label on the vehicle's sun visors refers to “ ADV AN[...]

  • Page 238

    If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger airbag status indicator , it means that the right front passenger frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate). If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag status indicator , it means that the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag. If, after several seconds, both status indicator lights remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing system. See your dealer/retailer for service. { W ARNING: If the airbag readiness light ever comes on and stays on, it means that something may be wrong with the airbag system. T o help avoid injury[...]

  • Page 239

    V oltmeter Gage When the engine is not running, but the ignition is on, this gage shows the battery's state of charge in DC volts. When the engine is running, the gage shows the condition of the charging system. The charging system regulates voltage based on the state of the battery for improved fuel economy and battery life. The gage may transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher reading, this is normal. Readings between the low and high warning zones indicate the normal operating range. The gage may also read low during the fuel economy mode, this is normal. Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicl[...]

  • Page 240

    If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there could be a brake problem. Have the brake system inspected right away . This light can also come on due to low brake fluid. See Brakes on page 6 ‑ 36 for more information. United States Canada This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN. If it does not come on then, have it fixed so it is ready to warn if there is a problem. { W ARNING: The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for s[...]

  • Page 241

    Antilock Brake System (ABS) W arning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System (ABS), this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer . If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the ABS light stays on, turn the ignition off. If the light comes on while driving, stop as soon as it is safely possible and turn the ignition off. Then start the engine again to reset the system. If the ABS light stays on, or comes on again while driving, the vehicle needs service. If the regular brake system warning light is not on, the vehicle still has brakes, but not antilock brakes. If the regular b[...]

  • Page 242

    Engine Coolant T emperature Gage United States Canada This gage shows the engine coolant temperature. It also provides an indicator of how hard the vehicle is working. During a majority of the operation, the gage will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If the vehicle is pulling a load or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity . See Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 31 . Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system, this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information abou[...]

  • Page 243

    When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated. A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 4 ‑ 43 for more information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 62 for more information. When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This indicates that there may be a problem with the T ire Pressure Monitor System. The light flashes for about a minute and stays on steady for the remainder of the ignition cycle. This sequence repeats w[...]

  • Page 244

    Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, after a while, the emission controls might not work as well, the vehicle's fuel economy might not be as good, and the engine might not run as smoothly . This could lead to costly repairs that might not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Notice: Modifications made to the engine, transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of the vehicle or the replacement of the original tires with other [...]

  • Page 245

    Light On Steady : An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following: . Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling the T ank on page 6 ‑ 10 . The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap allows fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn the light off. . If the vehicle has been driven through a deep puddle of water , the vehicle's electrical system might be wet. The condition is usually corrected when the[...]

  • Page 246

    Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection: . The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running, or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on. . The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered not [...]

  • Page 247

    This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer . If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the engine properly . The vehicle could be low on oil and it might have some other system problem. Engine Oil Pressure Gage United States Canada The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in kPa (kilopascals). Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity , but readings above the low pressure[...]

  • Page 248

    Security Light For information regarding this light and the vehicle's security system, see Content Theft-Deterrent on page 3 ‑ 27 . Fog Lamp Light The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 4 ‑ 13 for more information. Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the cruise control is set. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 4 ‑ 7 for more information. Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 4 ‑ 5 for more information. 4-40[...]

  • Page 249

    T ow/Haul Mode Light For vehicles with the tow/haul mode feature, this light comes on when the T ow/Haul mode has been activated. For more information, see T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 42 . Fuel Gage United States Canada When the ignition is on, the fuel gage shows how much fuel the vehicle has left in the tank. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. 4-41[...]

  • Page 250

    The gage first indicates empty before the vehicle is out of fuel, and the fuel tank should be filled soon. When the fuel tank is low , the FUEL LEVEL LOW message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 4 ‑ 57 for more information. Here are some situations customers may experience with the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. . At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. . It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually took a little more or less than half the tank's capacity to[...]

  • Page 251

    Driver Information Center (DIC) Y our vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected. All messages will appear in the DIC display located below the tachometer in the instrument panel cluster . The DIC comes on when the ignition is on. After a short delay , the DIC will display the information that was last displayed before the engine was turned off. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, see “ DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) ” later in this section and DIC V ehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 68 for the displays available. If your vehicle does not [...]

  • Page 252

    DIC Buttons The buttons are the trip/fuel, vehicle information, customization, and set/reset buttons. The button functions are detailed in the following pages. 3 (T rip/Fuel): Press this button to display the odometer , trip odometer , fuel range, average economy , fuel used, timer , instantaneous economy and Active Fuel Management ™ indicator , and transmission temperature. The compass and outside air temperature will also be shown in the display . The temperature will be shown in °F or °C depending on the units selected. T (V ehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, units, tire pressure readings for vehicles with the T ire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), trailer [...]

  • Page 253

    T rip/Fuel Menu Items 3 (T rip/Fuel): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items: Odometer Press the trip/fuel button until ODOMETER displays. This display shows the distance the vehicle has been driven in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km). Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the odometer . T o switch between English and metric measurements, see “ Units ” later in this section. T rip Odometer Press the trip/fuel button until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer . Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also display the trip odometer . T[...]

  • Page 254

    Fuel Range Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle's fuel economy over recent driving history and the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank. This estimate will change if driving conditions change. For example, if driving in traffic and making frequent stops, this display may read one number , but if the vehicle is driven on a freeway , the number may change even though the same amount of fuel is in the fuel tank. This is because [...]

  • Page 255

    T ransmission T emperature Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays. This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C). Instantaneous Economy and Active Fuel Management ™ Indicator If your vehicle has this display , press the trip/fuel button until INST ECON V8 displays. This display shows the current fuel economy at a particular moment and will change frequently as driving conditions change. This display shows the instantaneous fuel economy in miles per gallon (mpg) or liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km). Unlike average economy , this screen cannot be reset. An Active Fuel Management indicator wi[...]

  • Page 256

    Remember , you must reset the OIL LIFE display yourself after each oil change. It will not reset itself. Also, be careful not to reset the OIL LIFE display accidentally at any time other than when the oil has just been changed. It cannot be reset accurately until the next oil change. T o reset the engine oil life system, see Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 18 . Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays. This display allows you to select between English or Metric units of measurement. Once in this display , press the set/reset button to select between ENGLISH or METRIC units. All of the vehicle information will then be displayed in the unit of measurement selected. [...]

  • Page 257

    Relearn Remote Key This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore, they must be relearned as additional transmitters. T o match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle: 1. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays. 2. Press the set/reset button until REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE is displayed. 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds. On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitter learned will match driver 1 and the second will match driver 2. A chime will sound indi[...]

  • Page 258

    T rip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer . The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed. The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip. T o use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least [...]

  • Page 259

    DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system. The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster . Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages. The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected. If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, you can use the trip odometer reset stem to view the following displays: language selection, trip odometer , transmission temperature, trailer brake gain and output informa[...]

  • Page 260

    T rip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer . The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed. The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip. T o use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least [...]

  • Page 261

    Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone. See DIC Compass on page 4 ‑ 55 for more information. Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC Compass on page 4 ‑ 55 for more information. Oil Life T o access this display , the vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil's remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display , that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. When the remaining oil l[...]

  • Page 262

    Relearn Remote Key T o access this display , the vehicle must be in P (Park). This display allows you to match Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitters to your vehicle. This procedure will erase all previously learned transmitters. Therefore, they must be relearned as additional transmitters. T o match an RKE transmitter to your vehicle: 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until RELEARN REMOTE KEY displays. 2. Press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds. The message REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE will display . 3. Press and hold the lock and unlock buttons on the first transmitter at the same time for about 15 seconds. On vehicles with memory recall seats, the first transmitte[...]

  • Page 263

    DIC Compass Y our vehicle may have a compass in the Driver Information Center (DIC). Compass Zone The zone is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory . Y our dealer/retailer will set the correct zone for your location. Under certain circumstances, such as during a long distance cross-country trip or moving to a new state or province, it will be necessary to compensate for compass variance by resetting the zone through the DIC if the zone is not set correctly . Compass variance is the difference between the earth's magnetic north and true geographic north. If the compass is not set to the zone where you live, the compass may give false readings. The compass must be set to the variance[...]

  • Page 264

    2. Find the vehicle's current location and variance zone number on the map. Zones 1 through 15 are available. 3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone. 4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading, for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC. Or , if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to select the next available variance zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate variance zone is displayed. 5. If calibration is necessary , calibrate the compass. See “ Compass Calibration Procedure ” following. Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated. [...]

  • Page 265

    T o calibrate the compass, use the following procedure: Compass Calibration Procedure 1. Before calibrating the compass, make sure the compass zone is set to the variance zone in which the vehicle is located. See “ Compass V ariance (Zone) Procedure ” earlier in this section. Do not operate any switches such as window , sunroof, climate controls, seats, etc. during the calibration procedure. 2. Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CALIBRA TE COMP ASS displays. Or , if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem until CALIBRA TE COMP ASS displays. 3. Press the set/reset button to start the compass calibration. Or , if the vehicle does not hav[...]

  • Page 266

    BA TTERY LOW ST ART VEHICLE When the vehicle ’ s battery is severely discharged, this message will display and four chimes will sound. Start the vehicle immediately . If the vehicle is not started and the battery continues to discharge, the climate controls, heated seats, and audio systems will shut off and the vehicle may require a jump start. These systems will function again after the vehicle is started. CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON This message displays when the engine oil needs to be changed. When you change the engine oil, be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message. See Engine Oil Life System on page 6 ‑ 18 for information on how to reset the message. See Engine Oil on page 6 ?[...]

  • Page 267

    As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. This message clears if the trailer is reconnected. This message also clears if you acknowledge it. If this message still displays, either your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your dealer/retailer . See “ Integrated Trailer Brake Control System ” under T owing a T railer on page 5 ‑ 47 for more information. DRIVER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door[...]

  • Page 268

    ENGINE OVERHEA TED IDLE ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur . If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 6 ‑ 31 for more information. This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant T emperature Gage on page 4 ‑ 34 . See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 ‑ 33 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency . ENGINE OVERHEA TED STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is o[...]

  • Page 269

    ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible. LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may occur . If a low oil pressure warning appears on the Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until the cause of the low oil pressure is[...]

  • Page 270

    REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. See “ Matching Transmitter(s) to Y our Vehicle ” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 4 and DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 43 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 51 for more information. REPLACE BA TTERY IN REMOTE KEY This message displays if a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter battery is low . The battery needs to be replaced in the transmitter . See “ Battery Replacement ” under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 4 . RIGHT REAR DOOR OPEN This[...]

  • Page 271

    SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM This message displays along with the brake system warning light if there is a problem with the brake system. See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31 . If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display . If the message is still displayed or appears again when you begin driving, the brake system needs service as soon as possible. See your dealer/retailer . SERVICE BRAKES SOON This message displays if there is a problem with the brake system. If this message appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC dis[...]

  • Page 272

    SERVICE TIRE MONITOR SYSTEM On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays if a part on the TPMS is not working properly . The tire pressure light also flashes and then remains on during the same ignition cycle. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4 ‑ 34 . Several conditions may cause this message to appear . See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 ‑ 65 for more information. If the warning comes on and stays on, there may be a problem with the TPMS. See your dealer/retailer . SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL If your vehicle has StabiliT rak, this message displays when there is a problem with the Traction Control System (TCS). When this message displays, the sys[...]

  • Page 273

    There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear . . One condition is overheating, which could occur if StabiliT rak activates continuously for an extended period of time. . The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 4 ‑ 31 . . The message could display if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions. . The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer . . The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted into 4LO (T wo Speed Transfer Case Only). The message turns o[...]

  • Page 274

    TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE On vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), this message displays when the pressure in one or more of the vehicle's tires needs to be checked. This message also displays LEFT FRT (left front), RIGHT FRT (right front), LEFT RR (left rear), or RIGHT RR (right rear) to indicate the location of the low tire. The low tire pressure warning light will also come on. See Tire Pressure Light on page 4 ‑ 34 . Y ou can receive more than one tire pressure message at a time. T o read the other messages that may have been sent at the same time, press the set/reset button or the trip odometer reset stem. If a tire pressure message appears on the DIC, stop as soo[...]

  • Page 275

    TRANSMISSION HOT IDLE ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the transmission fluid is overheating and the transmission temperature warning is displayed on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you can damage the transmission. This could lead to costly repairs that would not be covered by your warranty . Do not drive your vehicle with overheated transmission fluid or while the transmission temperature warning is displayed. This message displays along with a sound if the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot. Driving with the transmission fluid temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle. Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission to cool. This message cle[...]

  • Page 276

    DIC V ehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) Y our vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers. All of the customization options may not be available on your vehicle. Only the options available will be displayed on the DIC. The default settings for the customization features were set when your vehicle left the factory , but may have been changed from their default state since then. The customization preferences are automatically recalled. T o change customization preferences,[...]

  • Page 277

    DISPLA Y LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear . Press the customization button until the DISPLA Y LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display . Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: ENGLISH (default) : All messages will appear in English. FRANCAIS : All messages will appear in French. ESP ANOL : All messages will appear in Spanish. NO CHANGE : No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. Y ou can als[...]

  • Page 278

    AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 3 ‑ 1 1 for more information. Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF : None of the doors will automatically unlock. DRIVER A T KEY OUT : Only the driver's door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. DRIVER IN P ARK : Only the dr[...]

  • Page 279

    NO CHANGE : No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter . Y ou will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 3 ‑ 4 for more information. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this featu[...]

  • Page 280

    EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF . Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display . Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF : The exterior lamps will not turn on. 30 SECONDS (default) : The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds. 1 MINUTE : The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute. 2 MINUTES : The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes. NO CHANGE : No change will be ma[...]

  • Page 281

    CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime. Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display . Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: NORMAL : The chime volume will be set to a normal level. LOUD : The chime volume will be set to a loud level. NO CHANGE : No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. There is no default for chime volume. The volume will stay at the last known setting. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. P ARK TIL T[...]

  • Page 282

    EASY EXIT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information. Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: DOOR BUTTON ONL Y : No automatic seat exit recall will occur . The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit seat button. BUTTON & KEY OUT (default) : If the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the driver's seat will mo[...]

  • Page 283

    MEMOR Y SEA T RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 2 ‑ 8 for more information. Press the customization button until MEMORY SEA T RECALL appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF (default) : No remote memory seat recall will occur . ON : The driver's seat and, on some vehicles, the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmit[...]

  • Page 284

    F ACTOR Y SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings. Press the customization button until F ACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display . Press the set/ reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: RESTORE ALL (default) : The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. DO NOT RESTORE : The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. T o select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEA TURE SETTINGS This feature allows you [...]

  • Page 285

    Audio System(s) Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features. { W ARNING: T aking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving. This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. T o minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: . Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. . Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 . Notice: C[...]

  • Page 286

    Setting the Clock T o set the time and date: 1. T urn the ignition key to ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN, then press the O button to turn the radio on. 2. Press the H button to display HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour , minute, month, day , and year). 3. Press the softkey located under any one of the tabs to change that setting. 4. T o increase the time or date, do one of the following: . Press the softkey below the selected tab. . Press the ¨ SEEK button. . Press the FWD button. . T urn the f knob clockwise. 5. T o decrease the time or date, do one of the following: . Press the © SEEK button. . Press the s REV button. . T urn the f knob counterclockwise. T o change the time default setting from 12 [...]

  • Page 287

    Radio(s) Radio with CD/MP3 shown, Radio with CD/MP3/USB similar Radio with CD/MP3/DVD and USB The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system. 4-79[...]

  • Page 288

    Radios with CD and DVD Radios with CD/MP3/DVD and USB may have a Bose ® Surround Sound System. Some of its features are explained later in this section under , “ Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) ” . If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD/MP3/DVD and USB radio. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4 ‑ 125 The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.). Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo[...]

  • Page 289

    Noise Compensation T echnology : V ehicles with the L TZ package and a Bose ® Audio System include the Bose AudioPilot ® noise compensation technology . When turned on, AudioPilot ® continuously adjusts the audio system equalization, to compensate for background noise, so that music always sounds the same at the set volume level. This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well the music is heard. At higher volume settings, where the music is much louder than the background noise, there might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot ® . T o activate: 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. 2. Press the MENU button to display [...]

  • Page 290

    Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is stopped. T une to favorite stations using the softkeys, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 . F A V (Favorites) : A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six softkeys below the radio station frequency tabs and by using the radio favorites page button (F A V button). Press the F A V button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM, if equipped, [...]

  • Page 291

    Setting the T one (Bass/Midrange/T reble) BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble) : T o adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until the tone control tabs display . Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey below the tab. T urn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow , FWD (forward), or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are obtained. If a station's frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble. T o quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position, press the softkey under the BASS, MID, or TREB tab for more[...]

  • Page 292

    Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) BAL/F ADE (Balance/Fade) : T o adjust balance or fade, press the f knob until the speaker control tabs display . Continue pressing to highlight the desired tab, or press the softkey under the tab. T urn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow , FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels are obtained. T o quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, press the softkey under the BAL or F ADE tab for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. T o quickly adjust all speaker and tone controls to the middle posi[...]

  • Page 293

    Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu. T o remove an undesired category: 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Press the softkey below the XM CA T tab. 3. T urn the f knob to display the category to be removed. 4. Press the softkey under the Remove tab until the category name along with the word Removed displays. 5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories. Removed categories can be restored by pressing the softkey under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the softkey under the Restore All label. Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 8 km/h (5 mph). Radio Messages Calibration Error : The audio system has b[...]

  • Page 294

    Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 4 ‑ 1 12 later in this section for further detail. Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the CD or DVD player . If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be d[...]

  • Page 295

    Using the CD Player Inserting a Disc (Single CD Player) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. Inserting a Disc (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing in 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and in 30 seconds for a DVD, depending on media type and format ranges. If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the player , it stays in the player . When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by t[...]

  • Page 296

    Playing a CD f (T une): Turn to select tracks on the CD that is currently playing. © SEEK ¨ : Press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than ten seconds on the CD have played. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. For Radios with CD/MP3/DVD and USB, press the left arrow to go to the start of the current track, if more than five seconds on the CD have played. If less than five seconds on the CD have played, the previous track plays. Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either arrow is held, or pressed multiple times, the player continues moving backward or forward through the tracks on the CD. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse [...]

  • Page 297

    DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary) : Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player . If a portable audio player is not connected, “ No Aux Input Device ” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and does not indicate “ No Aux Input Device ” . If a front auxiliary device is connected, the DVD/CD AUX button cycles through all available options, such as: D[...]

  • Page 298

    Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc Radios with a Single CD player have the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “ Using an MP3 ” in the index. Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “ Using an MP3 ” in the index. CD Messages CHECK DISC : Radios with a Single CD player displays CHECK DISC and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs. Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other messages when an error occurs: Optical Error : The disc was inserted[...]

  • Page 299

    Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See “ Remote Control ” , under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 4 ‑ 125 and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 4 ‑ 134 for more information. The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs. The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW , DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R/ RW , DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats. If an error message displays on the video screen or the radio, see “ DVD Display Error Messages ” under , Rear Se[...]

  • Page 300

    Ejecting a Disc Press the Z button on the radio to eject the disc. If a disc is ejected from the radio, but not removed, the radio reloads the disc after a short period of time. The disc is stored in the radio. The radio does not resume play of the disc automatically . If the RSA system is sourced to the DVD, the movie when reloaded into the DVD player begins to play again. In case loading and reading of a DVD or CD cannot be completed (unknown format, etc.), and the disc fails to eject, press and hold the DVD Z button more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. Playing a DVD DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary) : Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio.[...]

  • Page 301

    f (T une): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD. © SEEK (Previous T rack/Chapter): Press the left arrow to return to the start of the current track or chapter . Press the left arrow again to go to the previous track or chapter . This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. SEEK ¨ (Next T rack/Chapter): Press the right arrow to go to the next track or chapter . This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. s REV (Fast Reverse): Press to quickly reverse the CD or DVD at five times the normal speed. The radio displays the elapsed time while in fast reverse. T o stop fast reversing, press again. Th[...]

  • Page 302

    Some DVDs begin playing after the previews have finished, although there could be a delay of up to 30 seconds. If the DVD does not begin playing the movie automatically , press the softkey under the play/pause tab on the radio. If the DVD still does not play , refer to the on-screen instructions, if available. c (Stop): Press to stop playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding a DVD. r (Enter): Press to select the choices that are highlighted in any menu. y (Menu): Press to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the softkey under the navigation arrows to navigate the cursor through the DVD menu. After making a selection press this button. This button only operates when u[...]

  • Page 303

    Stopping and Resuming Playback T o stop playing a DVD without turning off the system, press the c button on the remote control, or press the softkey under the stop or the play/pause tab displayed on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD-V , press the DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source. T o resume DVD playback, press the r / j button on the remote control, or press the softkey under the play/pause tab displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has been ejected or the stop button has been pressed twice[...]

  • Page 304

    Drivers are encouraged to set up any auxiliary device while the vehicle is in P (Park). See Defensive Driving on page 5 ‑ 2 for more information on driver distraction. T o use a portable audio player , connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cable to the radio's front auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers. For optimal sound quality , increase the portable audio device's volume to the loudest level. It is always best to power the portable audio device through its own battery while playing. O (Power/V olume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the porta[...]

  • Page 305

    Using the USB Port Radios with a USB port can control a USB storage device or an iPod ® using the radio buttons and knobs. See Using an MP3 (Radios with CD) on page 4 ‑ 97 or Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD) on page 4 ‑ 105 for information about how to connect and control a USB storage device or an iPod. USB Support The USB connector is located on the instrument panel or in the center console, and uses the USB 2.0 standard. USB Supported Devices . USB Flash Drives . Portable USB Hard Drives . Fifth generation or later iPod . iPod nanos . iPod touch . iPod classic Not all iPods and USB Drives are compatible with the USB port. Make sure the iPod has the latest firmware from Apple ® [...]

  • Page 306

    Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio can play discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3 files. If both formats are on the disc, the radio reads all MP3 files first, then the uncompressed CD audio files. CD ‐ R or CD ‐ RW Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports: . Up to 50 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 50 playlists. . Up to 255 files. . Playlists with an .m3u or .wpl extension. . Files with an .mp3, .wma, or .cda file extension. USB Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports: . Up to 700 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 65,535 files. . Folder and file names up to 64 bytes. . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extensi[...]

  • Page 307

    Empty Folder Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the player advances to the next folder that contains files. Order of Play Compressed audio files are accessed in the following order: . Playlists (Px). . Files stored in the root directory . . Files stored in folders in the root directory . T racks are played in the following order: . Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist. . Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder . W[...]

  • Page 308

    Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous) and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the © SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that have been recorded without using file folders can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not accessible. Playing a CD-R or CD-RW MP3 f (T une): Turn to select MP3 files on the CD currently playing. © SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks. ¨ SEEK: Press to[...]

  • Page 309

    T o listen to files by another artist, press the softkey located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order . Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the desired artist displays. T o change from playback by artist to playback by album: 1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab. 2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from the sort screen. 3. Press the softkey below the back tab to return to the main music navigator screen. The album name displays on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begin to play . Once all songs from that album have played, the player moves to the next albu[...]

  • Page 310

    Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs and display song information on the radio ’ s display . f (T une): Turn to select files. © SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks. ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks. s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly . Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. FW[...]

  • Page 311

    c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive. T o browse and select files: 1. Press the softkey below c . 2. T urn f to scroll through the list of folders. 3. Press f to select the desired folder. If there is more then one folder , repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the desired folder is reached. 4. T urn f to scroll through the files in the selected folder . 5. Press f to select the desired file to be played. T o skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: . First softkey , first item in the list. . Second softkey , 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Third softkey , 5% thro[...]

  • Page 312

    T o skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: . First softkey , first item in the list. . Second softkey , 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Third softkey , 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Fourth softkey , 10% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Fifth softkey , end of the list. Repeat Functionality T o use Repeat: Press the softkey below " or ' to select between Repeat All and Repeat T rack. " (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or[...]

  • Page 313

    Using an MP3 (Radios with CD and DVD) Format The radio can play .mp3 or .wma files that were recorded onto a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The USB port can play .mp3 and .wma files that are stored on a USB storage device as well as AAC files that are stored on an iPod ® . Compressed Audio or Mixed Mode Discs The radio plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files depending on which slot the disc is loaded into. The DVD Player only reads uncompressed audio and ignores MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc. The CD Player reads both uncompressed audio and MP3/WMA files on a mixed mode disc. Uncompressed audio is played before MP3/WMA files. Press the CA T (category) button to toggle[...]

  • Page 314

    USB Supported File and Folder Structure The radio supports: . Up to 700 folders. . Up to 8 folders in depth. . Up to 65,535 files. . Folder and file names up to 64 bytes. . Files with an .mp3 or .wma file extension. . AAC files stored on an iPod. . F A T16 . F A T32 Root Directory The root directory of the disc is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory displays as F1 ROOT on the radio. If a disc contains both uncompressed CD audio and MP3/WMA files, a folder under the root directory called CD accesses all of the CD audio tracks on the disc. Empty Folder Folders that do not contain files are skipped, and the player advances to the next folder that[...]

  • Page 315

    Order of Play Compressed audio files are accessed in the following order: . Playlists. . Files stored in the root directory . . Files stored in folders in the root directory . T racks are played in the following order: . Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist. . Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder . When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder . When play enters a ne[...]

  • Page 316

    Playing an MP3/WMA File From a Disc (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) If a disc is inserted into the top DVD slot, the rear seat operator can turn on the video screen and use the remote control to navigate the CD (tracks only). f (T une): Turn to select MP3/WMA files. © SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if less than five seconds have played. Press to go to the previous track if more then five seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks. ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks. s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly . Sound i[...]

  • Page 317

    When the scan is finished, the disc begins playing files in order by artist. The current artist playing is shown on the second line of the display . Once all songs by that artist are played, the player moves to the next artist in alphabetical order and begins playing files by that artist. T o listen to files by another artist, press the softkey located below either arrow tab. The disc goes to the next or previous artist in alphabetical order . Continue pressing either softkey below the arrow tab until the artist displays. T o change from playback by artist to playback by album: 1. Press the softkey located below the Sort By tab. 2. Press one of the softkeys below the album tab from the sort [...]

  • Page 318

    Using the Radio to Control a USB Storage Device or iPod The radio can control a USB storage device or an iPod using the radio buttons and knobs and display song information on the radio ’ s display . f (T une): Turn to select files. © SEEK: Press to go to the start of the track, if more than ten seconds have played. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving backward through tracks. ¨ SEEK: Press to go to the next track. Press and hold or press multiple times to continue moving forward through tracks. s REV (Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly . Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release s REV to resume playing. The elapsed time of the file displays. FW[...]

  • Page 319

    c (Folder View): Press the softkey below c to view the contents of the current folder on the USB drive. T o browse and select files: 1. Press the softkey below c . 2. T urn f to scroll through the list of folders. 3. Press f to select the folder . If there is more than one folder , repeat Steps 1 and 2 until the folder is reached. 4. T urn f to scroll through the files in the selected folder . 5. Press f to select the file to be played. T o skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: . First softkey , first item in the list. . Second softkey , 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Third softkey , 5% through the list each time [...]

  • Page 320

    T o skip through large lists, the five softkeys can be used to navigate in the following order: . First softkey , first item in the list. . Second softkey , 1% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Third softkey , 5% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Fourth softkey , 10% through the list each time the softkey is pressed. . Fifth softkey , end of the list. Repeat Functionality T o use Repeat: Press the softkey below " or ' to select between Repeat All and Repeat T rack. " (Repeat All): Press the softkey below " to repeat all tracks. The tab appears lowered when Repeat All is being used. This is the default mode when a USB storage device or[...]

  • Page 321

    No XM Signal : The system is functioning correctly , but the vehicle is in a location that is blocking the XM ™ signal. When the vehicle is moved into an open area, the signal should return. Loading XM : The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text data. No action is needed. This message should disappear shortly . Channel Off Air : This channel is not currently in service. Tune in to another channel. Channel Unauth : This channel is blocked or cannot be received with your XM Subscription package. Channel Unavail : This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets, choose another station for that preset but[...]

  • Page 322

    Navigation/Radio System For vehicles with a navigation radio system, see the separate Navigation System manual. Bluetooth ® V ehicles with a Bluetooth system can use a Bluetooth capable cell phone with a Hands Free Profile to make and receive phone calls. The system can be used while the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY position. The range of the Bluetooth system can be up to 9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones support all functions, and not all phones are guaranteed to work with the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. See www .gm.com/bluetooth for more information on compatible phones. V oice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and [...]

  • Page 323

    Pairing A Bluetooth enabled cell phone must be paired to the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system first and then connected to the vehicle before it can be used. See the cell phone manufacturers user guide for Bluetooth functions before pairing the cell phone. If a Bluetooth phone is not connected, calls will be made using OnStar ® Hands ‐ Free Calling, if available. Refer to the OnStar owner's guide for more information. Pairing Information: . Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system. . The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving. . The in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the or[...]

  • Page 324

    Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Bluetooth ” . The system responds with “ Bluetooth ready ” followed by a tone. 3. Say “ List ” . The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the system will say “ Is connected ” after the connected phone. Deleting a Paired Phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Bluetooth ” . The system responds with “ Bluetooth ready ” followed by a tone. 3. Say “ Delete ” . The system asks which phone to delete follo[...]

  • Page 325

    Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually . 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Store ” . The system responds with “ Store, number please ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses. . If the system recognizes the number it responds with “ OK, Storing ” and repeats the phone number . . If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone number , it responds with “ Store ” and repeats the number followed by “ Please say yes or no ” . If the number is correct, say “ Y es ” . If the n[...]

  • Page 326

    3. Say the first digit to be stored. The system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone. Continue entering digits until the number to be stored is complete. . If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say “ Clear ” at any time to clear the last number . . T o hear all of the numbers recognized by the system, say “ V erify ” at any time and the system will repeat them. 4. After the complete number has been entered, say “ Store ” . The system responds with “ Please say the name tag ” followed by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone number . The name tag is recorded and the system responds with “ About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK? ?[...]

  • Page 327

    Using the Delete Command The delete command allows specific name tags to be deleted. T o use the delete command: 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Delete ” . The system responds with “ Delete, please say the name tag ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag to be deleted. The system responds with “ Would you like to delete, <name tag>? Please say yes or no ” . . If the name tag is correct, say “ Y es ” to delete the name tag. The system responds with “ OK, deleting <name tag>, returning to the main menu. ” . If the name tag is incorrect, say “ No ” . The system responds with “ No. [...]

  • Page 328

    Using the Dial Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Dial ” . The system responds with “ Dial using <phone name> ” . “ Number please ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the entire number without pausing. . If the system recognizes the number , it responds with “ OK, Dialing ” and dials the number . . If the system does not recognize the number , it confirms the numbers followed by a tone. If the number is correct, say “ Y es ” . The system responds with “ OK, Dialing ” and dials the number . If the number is not correct, say “ No ” . The system will ask for the number to be re ‐ entered.[...]

  • Page 329

    Using the Call Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Call ” . The system responds with “ Call using <phone name>. Please say the name tag ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag of the person to call. . If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with “ OK, calling, <name tag> ” and dials the number . . If the system is unsure it recognizes the right name tag, it confirms the name tag followed by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “ Y es ” . The system responds with “ OK, calling, <name tag> ” and dials the number . If the name tag is not correct, say “ No[...]

  • Page 330

    Call W aiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. . Press b g to answer an incoming call when another call is active. The original call is placed on hold. . Press b g again to return to the original call. . T o ignore the incoming call, continue with the original call with no action. . Press c x to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold. Three ‐ W ay Calling Three ‐ W ay Calling must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. 1. While on a call press b g . The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Three ‐ way call ” . The[...]

  • Page 331

    T ransferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone. T o T ransfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle: 1. Press b g . The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ T ransfer Call. ” The system responds with “ T ransferring call ” and the audio will switch from the vehicle to the cell phone. T o T ransfer Audio to the In-V ehicle Bluetooth System The cellular phone must be paired and connected with the Bluetooth system before a call can be transferred. The connection process can take up to two minutes after the key is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC/ ACCESSORY position. During a[...]

  • Page 332

    Sending a Number During a Call 1. Press b g . The system responds with “ Ready ” followed by a tone. 2. Say “ Dial ” . The system responds with “ Say a number to send tones ” followed by a tone. 3. Say the number to send. . If the system clearly recognizes the number it responds with “ OK, Sending Number ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. . If the system is not sure it recognized the number properly , it responds “ Dial Number , Please say yes or no? ” followed by a tone. If the number is correct, say “ Y es ” . The system responds with “ OK, Sending Number ” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. Sending a Stored Name T ag During a[...]

  • Page 333

    Clearing the System Unless information is deleted out of the in ‐ vehicle Bluetooth system, it will be retained indefinitely . This includes all saved name tags in the phonebook and phone pairing information. For information on how to delete this information, see the above sections on Deleting a Paired Phone and Deleting Name T ags. Other Information The Bluetooth ® word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth ® SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by General Motors is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 19 for FCC information. Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System The vehicle may have a DVD Rea[...]

  • Page 334

    Parental Control can also be turned off by inserting or ejecting any disc, pressing the play icon on the radio DVD display menu, or changing an ignition position. Headphones The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated to the DVD player , while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature. The wireless headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control. If the vehicle has a third row video screen display , it has two addi[...]

  • Page 335

    Battery Replacement T o change the batteries on the headphones, do the following: 1. T urn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones. Slide the battery door open. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly , using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery door and tighten the door screw . If the headphones are to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks The A/V jacks, located on the rear of the floor console, allow audio or video signals to be connected from an auxiliary device such as a camcord[...]

  • Page 336

    T o use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary . See Radio(s) on page 4 ‑ 79 for more information. How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), screen brightness, and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu. T o chang[...]

  • Page 337

    Video Screen The video screen is located in the overhead console. T o use the video screen, do the following: 1. Push the release button located on the overhead console. 2. Move the screen to the desired position. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position. If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source. Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen. The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control. They are located at the re[...]

  • Page 338

    Remote Control Buttons O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen on and off. P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on. The backlight automatically turns off after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on. v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This function may vary for each disc. y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD. n , q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Us[...]

  • Page 339

    u (Next T rack/Chapter): Press this button to go to the beginning of the next chapter or track. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse the DVD or CD. T o stop fast reversing a DVD video, press the play button. T o stop fast reversing a DVD audio or CD, release this button. This button might not work when the DVD is playing the copyright information or the previews. [ (Fast Forward): Press this button to fast forward the DVD or CD. T o stop fast forwarding a DVD video, press the play/pause button. T o stop fast forwarding a DVD audio or CD, release this button. This button might not work[...]

  • Page 340

    Battery Replacement T o change the remote control batteries, do the following: 1. Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly , using the diagram on the inside of the battery compartment. 3. Replace the battery cover . If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool, dry place. Tips and T roubleshoo ting Chart Problem Recommended Action No power . The ignition might not be turned ON/RUN or in ACC/ACCESSORY . The picture does not fill the screen. There are black borders on the top and bottom or on both sides or it looks stretched ou[...]

  • Page 341

    Tips and T roubleshoo ting Chart (cont'd) Problem Recommended Action The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices. Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes. Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer/retailer for assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or soun[...]

  • Page 342

    Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water . Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water . Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) V ehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However , the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to, except on some radios where dual control is allowed. For example, rear seat passen[...]

  • Page 343

    P (Power): Press this button to turn RSA on and off. V olume : Turn this knob to increase or to decrease the volume of the wired headphones. The left knob controls the left wired headphones and the right knob controls the right wired headphones. SRCE (Source) : Press this button to switch between the radio FM, AM, or XM ™ (if equipped), CD, and if the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary , and rear auxiliary . © ¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM (if equipped), press the seek arrows to go to the previous or to the next station or channels and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Press and hold[...]

  • Page 344

    PROG (Program) : Press this button to go to the next preset radio station or channel set on the main radio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. When a CD or DVD audio disc is playing, press this button to go to the beginning of the CD or DVD audio. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a disc is playing in the CD or DVD changer , press this button to select the next disc, if multiple discs are loaded. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the disc. When a DVD video menu is being displayed, press the PROG but[...]

  • Page 345

    Radio T o select preset or favorite radio stations: Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous radio station stored as a preset or favorite. CD/DVD T o select tracks on a CD/DVD: Press and release w or x to go to the next or previous track. Select tracks on an iPod or USB Device (V ehicles without a Navigation System) 1. Press and hold w or x while listening to a song until the contents of the current folder display on the radio display . 2. Press and release w or x to scroll up or down the list, then press and hold w , or press ¨ to play the highlighted track. Navigating folders on an iPod or USB Device (V ehicles without a Navigation System): 1. Press and hold w or x while lis[...]

  • Page 346

    Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the Main Audio Screen (V ehicles with a Navigation System) Press and release w or x to select the next or previous track within the selected category . Press and hold w or x to move quickly through the tracks. Press and release ¨ to move up one track within the selected category . Navigating an iPod or USB Device on the Music Navigator Screen (V ehicles with a Navigation System) Press and release w or x to select the next or previous track within the selected category . Press and hold w or x to move quickly through the tracks within the selected category . Press and release ¨ to move up one track within the selected category . b g (Mute/Push to T alk): P[...]

  • Page 347

    For vehicles with a navigation system: 1. Press and hold ¨ until a beep is heard, to place the radio into SCAN mode, a station will play for five seconds before moving to the next station. 2. T o stop the SCAN function, press ¨ again. While listening to a CD/DVD, press and hold ¨ to quickly move forward through the tracks. Release to stop on the desired track. + e − e (V olume): Press to increase or to decrease the volume. Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or st[...]

  • Page 348

    XM ™ Satellite Radio Service XM Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous United States, and in Canada. Just as with FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out. In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the XM signal for a period of time. Cellular Phone Usage Cellular phone usage may cause interference with the vehicle's radio. This interference may occur when making or receiving phone calls, charging the phone's battery , or simply having the phone on. This interference causes an increased level of sta[...]

  • Page 349

    Section 5 Driving Y our V ehicle Y our Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 D r u n k D r i v i n g ... ................................ 5 - 2 Control of a V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 B r a k i n g ... ...................................... 5 - 3 Antilock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 Braking in Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5 StabiliT rak ® S y s t e m ............................. 5 - 6 Locking Rear Axle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Steering . [...]

  • Page 350

    Y our Driving, the Road, and the V ehicle Defensive Driving Defensive driving means “ always expect the unexpected. ” The first step in driving defensively is to wear your safety belt — See Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone on page 2 ‑ 15 . { W ARNING: Assume that other road users (pedestrians, bicyclists, and other drivers) are going to be careless and make mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and be ready . In addition: . Allow enough following distance between you and the driver in front of you. . Focus on the task of driving. Driver distraction can cause collisions resulting in injury or possible death. These simple defensive driving techniques could save your life. Drunk Dr[...]

  • Page 351

    For persons under 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol. There are good medical, psychological, and developmental reasons for these laws. The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol and then drive. Medical research shows that alcohol in a person's system can make crash injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash, that person's chance of being killed or permanently disabled is higher than if the person had not been drinking. Control of a V ehicle The following three systems help to c[...]

  • Page 352

    Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive in spurts, heavy acceleration followed by heavy braking, rather than keeping pace with traffic. This is a mistake. The brakes might not have time to cool between hard stops. The brakes will wear out much faster with a lot of heavy braking. Keeping pace with the traffic and allowing realistic following distances eliminates a lot of unnecessary braking. That means better braking and longer brake life. If the engine ever stops while the vehicle is being driven, brake normally but do not pump the brakes. If the brakes are pumped, the pedal could get harder to push down. If the engine stops, there will still be some power brake assist but it will be[...]

  • Page 353

    Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely . Suddenly , an animal jumps out in front of you. Y ou slam on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what happens with ABS: A computer senses that the wheels are slowing down. If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer will separately work the brakes at each front wheel and at both rear wheels. ABS can change the brake pressure to each wheel, as required, faster than any driver could. This can help the driver steer around the obstacle while braking hard. As the brakes are applied, the computer keeps receiving updates on wheel speed and controls braking pressure accordingly . Remember: ABS does not change the time neede[...]

  • Page 354

    StabiliT rak ® System The vehicle has a vehicle stability enhancement system called StabiliT rak. It is an advanced computer controlled system that assists the driver with directional control of the vehicle in difficult driving conditions. StabiliT rak activates when the computer senses a discrepancy between the intended path and the direction the vehicle is actually traveling. StabiliTrak selectively applies braking pressure at any one of the vehicle's brakes to assist the driver with keeping the vehicle on the intended path. When the vehicle is started and begins to move, the system performs several diagnostic checks to insure there are no problems. The system may be heard or felt wh[...]

  • Page 355

    The StabiliT rak light will flash on the instrument panel cluster when the system is both on and activated. The system may be heard or felt while it is working; this is normal. The traction control disable button is located on the instrument panel below the climate controls. The traction control part of StabiliT rak can be turned off by pressing and releasing the StabiliT rak button if both systems (traction control and StabiliT rak) were previously on. T o disable both traction control and StabiliT rak, press and hold the button for five seconds. T raction control and StabiliTrak can be turned on by pressing and releasing the StabiliT rak button if not automatically shut off for any other r[...]

  • Page 356

    T raction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system. T raction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) and by applying brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary . The traction control system is enabled automatically when the vehicle is started. It will activate and the StabiliT rak light will flash if it senses that any of the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction while driving. If traction control is turned off, only the brake-traction control portion of traction control will work. The engine speed management will be disabled. In this mode, engine power is not red[...]

  • Page 357

    Steering Power Steering If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort. Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. T raction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at which the curve is banked, and vehicle speed. While in a curve, speed is the one factor that can be controlled. If there is a need to reduce speed, do it before entering the curve, while the front wheels are straight. T ry to adjust the speed so you can drive through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed. W ait to accelerate until out of the curve, and t[...]

  • Page 358

    An emergency like this requires close attention and a quick decision. If holding the steering wheel at the recommended 9 and 3 o'clock positions, it can be turned a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly , and just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have avoided the object. The fact that such emergency situations are always possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving at all times and wear safety belts properly . Off-Road Recovery The vehicle's right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be [...]

  • Page 359

    Passing Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be dangerous. T o reduce the risk of danger while passing: . Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads for situations that might affect a successful pass. If in doubt, wait. . W atch for traffic signs, pavement markings, and lines that could indicate a turn or an intersection. Never cross a solid or double ‐ solid line on your side of the lane. . Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to pass. Doing so can reduce your visibility . . W ait your turn to pass a slow vehicle. . When you are being passed, ease to the right. Loss of Control Let us review what driving experts say about what happens when the three control syste[...]

  • Page 360

    While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, or braking, including reducing vehicle speed by shifting to a lower gear . Any sudden changes could cause the tires to slide. Y ou may not realize the surface is slippery until the vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize warning clues — such as enough water , ice, or packed snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and slow down when you have any doubt. Remember: Antilock brakes help avoid only the braking skid. Off-Road Driving V ehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road driving. V ehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles with 20 ‐ inch tire/wheel assemblies sh[...]

  • Page 361

    Before Y ou Go Off-Roading . Have all necessary maintenance and service work done. . Make sure there is enough fuel, that fluid levels are where they should be, and that the spare tire is fully inflated. . Be sure to read all the information about four-wheel-drive vehicles in this manual. . Make sure all underbody shields, if the vehicle has them, are properly attached. . Know the local laws that apply to off-roading where you will be driving or check with law enforcement people in the area. . Be sure to get the necessary permission if you will be on private land. If you think you will need some more ground clearance at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front fascia lower air dam[...]

  • Page 362

    Loading Y our V ehicle for Off-Road Driving { W ARNING: . Cargo on the load floor piled higher than the seatbacks can be thrown forward during a sudden stop. Y ou or your passengers could be injured. Keep cargo below the top of the seatbacks. . Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be tossed about when driving over rough terrain. Y ou or your passengers can be struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo properly . (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) . Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle's center of gravity , making it more likely to roll over . Y ou can be seriously or fatally injured if the vehicle rolls over . Put heavy loads inside the cargo area, not on the roof. Keep cargo in th[...]

  • Page 363

    Environmental Concerns Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. However , it also raises environmental concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment: . Always use established trails, roads, and areas that have been specially set aside for public off-road recreational driving and obey all posted regulations. . Avoid any driving practice that could damage shrubs, flowers, trees, or grasses or disturb wildlife. This includes wheel-spinning, breaking down trees, or unnecessary driving through streams or over soft ground. . Always carry a litter bag and make sure all refuse is removed from any ca[...]

  • Page 364

    Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-r oad driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed. At higher speeds: . Y ou approach things faster and have less time to react. . There is less time to scan the terrain for obstacles. . The vehicle has more bounce when driving over obstacles. . More braking distance is needed, especially on an unpaved surface. { W ARNING: When you are driving off-road, bouncing and quick changes in direction can easily throw you out of position. This could cause you to lose control and crash. So, whether you are driving on or off the road, you and your passengers should wear safety belts. Scanning the T errain Off-road driv[...]

  • Page 365

    When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the wheels can leave the ground. If this happens, even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the vehicle as well or at all. Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is especially important to avoid sudden acceleration, sudden turns, or sudden braking. Off-roading requires a different kind of alertness from driving on paved roads and highways. There are no road signs, posted speed limits, or signal lights. Use good judgment about what is safe and what is not. Driving on Hills Off-road driving often takes you up, down, or across a hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment and an understanding of what the vehicle can and c[...]

  • Page 366

    Driving Uphill Once you decide it is safe to drive up the hill: . Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the steering wheel. . Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain speed. Not using more power than needed can avoid spinning the wheels or sliding. { W ARNING: T urning or driving across steep hills can be dangerous. Y ou could lose traction, slide sideways, and possibly roll over . Y ou could be seriously injured or killed. When driving up hills, always try to go straight up. . T ry to drive straight up the hill if at all possible. If the path twists and turns, you might want to find another route. . Ease up on the speed as you approach the top of the hill. . Attach a flag to the v[...]

  • Page 367

    . If the engine has stopped running, you need to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the parking brake still applied, shift the transmission to P (Park) and restart the engine. Then, shift to R (Reverse), release the parking brake, and slowly back down the hill as straight as possible in R (Reverse). . While backing down the hill, put your left hand on the steering wheel at the 12 o'clock position so you can tell if the wheels are straight and can maneuver as you back down. It is best to back down the hill with the wheels straight rather than in the left or right direction. Turning the wheel too far to the left or right will increase the possibility of a rollover . Things not t[...]

  • Page 368

    Driving Downhill When off-roading takes you downhill, consider: . How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to maintain vehicle control? . What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough? Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel? . Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs? Boulders? . What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with large rocks? If you decide you can go down a hill safely , try to keep the vehicle headed straight down. Use a low gear so engine drag can help the brakes so they do not have to do all the work. Descend slowly , keeping the vehicle under control at all times. { W ARNING: Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes[...]

  • Page 369

    Driving Across an Incline An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. T o decide whether to try to drive across the incline, consider the following: { W ARNING: Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over . Y ou could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, do not drive across it. Find another route instead. . A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across. When going straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when dr[...]

  • Page 370

    Stalling on an Incline { W ARNING: Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over , you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over , you will be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over . Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow , or Ice When you drive in mud[...]

  • Page 371

    { W ARNING: Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the ice. Y our vehicle could fall through the ice and you and your passengers could drown. Drive your vehicle on safe surfaces only . Driving in W ater { W ARNING: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water , it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over . Do not drive through rushing water . Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Fi[...]

  • Page 372

    After Off-Road Driving Remove any brush or debris that has collected on the underbody , chassis, or under the hood. These accumulations can be a fire hazard. After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings cleaned and checked. These substances can cause glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure, steering, suspension, wheels, tires, and exhaust system for damage and check the fuel lines and cooling system for any leakage. The vehicle requires more frequent service due to off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule for additional information. Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or [...]

  • Page 373

    Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep ‐ standing or flowing water . { W ARNING: Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. Y ou could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally . Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away . If this happens[...]

  • Page 374

    Before Leaving on a Long T rip T o prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. Things to check on your own include: . Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows clean — inside and outside? . Wiper Blades: In good shape? . Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? . Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? . Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to recommended pressure? . Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date maps? Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving. If you become tired or sleepy , find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest. Other driv[...]

  • Page 375

    Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include: . Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. . Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. . Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear . { W ARNING: If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. Y ou would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. Y ou could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. { W ARNING: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The brakes[...]

  • Page 376

    Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 0°C (32°F) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction. T ry not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even mor[...]

  • Page 377

    Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby . If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 . T o get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe: . T urn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 . . T ie a red cloth to an outside mirror . { W ARNING: Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: . Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exh[...]

  • Page 378

    T o save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel. If Y our V ehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the v[...]

  • Page 379

    gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear . Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free the vehicle. If that does not get the vehicle out after a few tries, it might need to be towed out. Recovery hooks can be used, if the vehicle has them. If the vehicle does need to be towed out, see T owing Y our V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 39 . Recovery Hooks { W ARNING: These hooks, when used, are under a lot of force. Always pull the vehicle straight out. Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle. The hooks could break off and you or others could be injured fr[...]

  • Page 380

    Loading the V ehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry . This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-i nstalled options. T wo labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry , the T ire and Loading Information label and the Certification /T ire label. { W ARNING: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GA WR). If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way the vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloadin[...]

  • Page 381

    The T ire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 6 ‑ 54 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 62 . There is also important loading information on the vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GA WR) for the front and rear axles. See “ Certification/Tire Label ” later in this section. Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit 1. Locate the statement “ The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs ” on you[...]

  • Page 382

    Example 1 Item Description T otal A V ehicle Capacity Weight for Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight @ 150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 = 300 lbs (136 kg) C Available Occupant and Cargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg) Example 2 Item Description T otal A V ehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight @ 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs (136 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (1 13 kg) 5-34[...]

  • Page 383

    Example 3 Item Description T otal A V ehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight @ 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) Refer to your vehicle's tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle's capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver , passengers and cargo should never exceed your vehicle's capacity weight. 5-35[...]

  • Page 384

    Certification/Tire Label A vehicle specific Certification/T ire label is attached to the rear edge of the driver's door. The label shows the size of your vehicle's original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and cargo. The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle Weight Rating (GA WR). T o find out the actual loads on your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh station and weigh your vehicle. Y our dealer can help you with this. Be su[...]

  • Page 385

    { W ARNING: In the case of a sudden stop or collision, things carried in the bed of your truck could shift forward and come into the passenger area, injuring you and others. If you put things in the bed of your truck, you should make sure they are properly secured. { W ARNING: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross V ehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GA WR). If you do, parts (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way the vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. Y our warranty does not cover parts or com[...]

  • Page 386

    If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — they will go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly , or if there is a crash, they will keep going. { W ARNING: Things you put inside your vehicle can strike and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or in a crash. . Put things in the cargo area of your vehicle. T ry to spread the weight evenly . . Never stack heavier things, like suitcases, inside the vehicle so that some of them are above the tops of the seats. . Do not leave an unsecured child restraint in your vehicle. . When you carry something inside the vehicle, secure it whenever you can. . Do not leave a seat f[...]

  • Page 387

    T owing T owing Y our V ehicle T o avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 8 ‑ 7 . T o tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome, see “ Recreational V ehicle T owing ” following. Recreational V ehicle T owing Recreational vehicle towing means towing the vehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common types of recreational vehicle towing are known as dinghy towing and dolly towing. Dinghy towing is towing the vehicle[...]

  • Page 388

    Dinghy T owing T wo-Wheel-Drive V ehicles and Four-Wheel Drive V ehicles with a Single Speed Automatic T ransfer Case Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles with a single speed automatic transfer case should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. Four-wheel drive vehicles with a single speed automatic transfer case have no neutral position and wil[...]

  • Page 389

    Four-Wheel Drive V ehicles with a T wo Speed Automatic T ransfer Case Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four-wheel drive vehicle with a two speed automatic transfer case: 1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park). 2. T urn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake. 3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. { W ARNING: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 4. Shift [...]

  • Page 390

    Dolly T owing Front T owing (Front Wheels Off the Ground) T wo-Wheel-Drive V ehicles and Four-Wheel Drive V ehicles with a Single Speed Automatic T ransfer Case Notice: If a two-wheel drive vehicle or a four-wheel drive vehicle with a single speed automatic transfer case is towed with the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive vehicles and four-wheel drive vehicles with a single speed automatic transfer case should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground. T wo-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication [...]

  • Page 391

    Four-Wheel Drive V ehicles with a T wo Speed Automatic T ransfer Case Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from the front: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly . 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park). 4. Firmly set the parking brake. { W ARNING: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 5. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See ?[...]

  • Page 392

    Rear T owing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground) T wo-Wheel-Drive V ehicles and Four-Wheel Drive V ehicles with a Single Speed Automatic T ransfer Case Use the following procedure to dolly tow the vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly . 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. 7. For four-wheel drive vehicles wit[...]

  • Page 393

    Four-Wheel Drive V ehicles with a T wo Speed Automatic T ransfer Case Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel drive vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer's instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly . 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer's instructions. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. { W ARNING: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle's transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause [...]

  • Page 394

    Level Control Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension is available on light ‐ duty vehicles and comes as a part of the Autoride ® suspension, if equipped. This type of level control is fully automatic and will provide a better leveled riding position as well as better handling under a variety of passenger and loading conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is activated when the ignition key is turned to ON/RUN and will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter . The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up to ten minutes after the ignition k[...]

  • Page 395

    T owing a T railer Do not tow a trailer during break ‐ in. See New Vehicle Break-In on page 3 ‑ 31 for more information. { W ARNING: The driver can lose control when pulling a trailer if the correct equipment is not used or the vehicle is not driven properly . For example, if the trailer is too heavy , the brakes may not work well — or even at all. The driver and passengers could be seriously injured. The vehicle may also be damaged; the resulting repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Pull a trailer only if all the steps in this section have been followed. Ask your dealer/retailer for advice and information about towing a trailer with the vehicle. Notice: Pulling a tra[...]

  • Page 396

    Pulling A T railer Here are some important points: . There are many different laws, including speed limit restrictions, having to do with trailering. Make sure the rig will be legal, not only where you live but also where you will be driving. A good source for this information can be state or provincial police. . Consider using a sway control. See “ Hitches ” later in this section. . Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles (800 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle or other parts could be damaged. . Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that a trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps the engine a[...]

  • Page 397

    Use the following chart to determine how much the vehicle can weigh, based upon the vehicle model and options. Notice: Using a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch device on the vehicle could damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Do not use a fifth-wheel or goose-neck hitch device on the vehicle. V ehicle Axle Ratio Maximum T railer Weight GCWR * 1500 Series 2WD 5.3L V8 3.08 5,100 lbs (2 313 kg) 1 1,000 lbs (4 990 kg) 5.3L V8 3.42 5,600 lbs (2 540 kg) 1 1,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 Flex Fuel, K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 6.2L V8 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 1500 Series 4WD 5.3L LMG V8 3.42 5,400 lbs [...]

  • Page 398

    Weight of the T railer T ongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is very important because it is also part of the vehicle weight. The Gross V ehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle as well as trailer tongue weight. V ehicle options, equipment, passengers and cargo in the vehicle reduce the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry , which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow . See Loading the V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 for more information about the vehicle's maximum load capacity . T railer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to 15 percent and fifth wheel or goosene[...]

  • Page 399

    T otal Weight on the V ehicle's Tires Be sure the vehicle's tires are inflated to the inflation pressures found on the Certification label on the drivers door or see Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 for more information. Make sure not to exceed the GVWR limit for the vehicle, or the RGA WR, with the tow vehicle and trailer fully loaded for the trip including the weight of the trailer tongue. If using a weight distributing hitch, make sure not to exceed the RGA WR before applying the weight distribution spring bars. Weight of the T railering Combination It is important that the combination of the tow vehicle and trailer does not exceed any of its weight ratings — GCWR, GVWR, R[...]

  • Page 400

    Weight ‐ Distributing Hitch Adjustment A : Body to Ground Distance B : Front of Vehicle When using a weight-distributing hitch, the spring bars should be adjusted so the distance (A) is the same after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle and adjusting the hitch. Safety Chains Always attach chains between the vehicle and the trailer . Cross the safety chains under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue from contacting the road if it becomes separated from the hitch. Instructions about safety chains may be provided by the hitch manufacturer or by the trailer manufacturer . If the trailer being towed weighs up to 5,000 lbs (2 271 kg) with a factory-installed step bumper , saf[...]

  • Page 401

    T ow/Haul Mode Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the tow/haul mode. This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the tow/haul mode is on. T ow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 42 for more information. T ow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle's Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “ Weight of the T railer ” earlier in the section. T ow/Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions: . When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through[...]

  • Page 402

    T railer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer . Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly . Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliT rak ® , the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle's hydraulic system. Integrated T railer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated T railer Brake Control (ITBC) system for electric trailer brakes. This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control System. The power output to the trailer[...]

  • Page 403

    { W ARNING: Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBC system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle, trailer , or other property . An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with surge, air or electric ‐ over ‐ hydraulic trailer brake systems. T o determine the type of brakes on the trailer and the availability of controllers, check with your trailer manufacturer or dealer/ retailer . When trailering, make sure of the following: . The ITBC system is used only with trailers that are equipped with elect[...]

  • Page 404

    T railer Brake Control Panel A. Manual T railer Brake Apply Lever B. T railer Gain Adjustment Buttons The ITBC system has a control panel located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. See Instrument Panel on page 1 ‑ 2 . The control panel allows adjustment to the amount of output, referred to as trailer gain, available to the electric trailer brakes and allows manual application the trailer brakes. The T railer Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake Display Page on the DIC to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes. T railer Brake DIC Display Page The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle ’ s Driver Information Center (DIC). [...]

  • Page 405

    All DIC warning and service messages must first be acknowledged by the driver by pressing the odometer trip stem or the DIC V ehicle Information button (if equipped) before the Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed and T railer Gain can be adjusted. TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed anytime the T railer Brake Display Page is active. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected. T o adjust the Trailer Gain, press one of the T railer Gain adjustment buttons located on the T railer Brake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain button to cause the T railer Gain to continuously adjust. T o turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the [...]

  • Page 406

    If the vehicle ’ s service brakes are applied while using the Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever , the trailer output power will be the greater of the two. The trailer and the vehicle's brake lamps will come on when either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied. T railer Gain Adjustment Procedure T railer Gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle loading, trailer loading or road surface conditions change. Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the best trailer stopping performance. A trailer that is over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes. A trailer that is under-gained may result in not enough trailer bra[...]

  • Page 407

    6. Adjust the Trailer Gain to just below the point of trailer wheel lock-up, indicated by trailer wheel squeal or tire smoke when a trailer wheel locks. T railer wheel lock-up may not occur if towing a heavily loaded trailer . In this case, adjust the T railer Gain to the highest allowable setting for the towing condition. 7. Re-adjust T railer Gain any time vehicle loading, trailer loading or road surface conditions change or if trailer wheel lock-up is noticed at any time while towing Other ITBC Related DIC Messages In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and ITBC system status is displayed in the DIC. TRAILER CONNECTED – This message[...]

  • Page 408

    T o determine if the electrical fault is on the vehicle side or trailer side of the trailer wiring harness connection, do the following: 1. Disconnect the trailer wiring harness from the vehicle. 2. T urn the ignition OFF . 3. W ait ten seconds, then turn the ignition back to RUN. 4. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message re-appears, the electrical fault is on the vehicle side. If the CHECK TRAILER WIRING message only re-appears when connecting the trailer wiring harness to the vehicle, the electrical fault is on the trailer side. SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message will be displayed when there is a problem with the ITBC system. If this message persists over multiple ignition cycles t[...]

  • Page 409

    Driving with a T railer { W ARNING: When towing a trailer , exhaust gases may collect at the rear of the vehicle and enter if the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window is open. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. T o maximize safety when towing a trailer: . Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks and make necessary repairs before starting a trip. . Never drive with the liftgate, trunk/hatch, or rear-most window open. . Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. . Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest se[...]

  • Page 410

    Following Distance Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as you would when driving the vehicle without a trailer . This can help to avoid heavy braking and sudden turns. Passing More passing distance is needed when towing a trailer . The combination will not accelerate as quickly and is longer so it is necessary to go much farther beyond the passed vehicle before returning to the lane. Backing Up Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, move that hand to the left. T o move the trailer to the right, move your hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible, have someone guide you. Making T urns Notice: Making very shar[...]

  • Page 411

    Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes might get hot and no longer work well. V ehicles can tow in D (Drive). Shift the transmission to a lower gear if the transmission shifts too often under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions. The tow/haul mode may be used if the transmission shifts too often. See T ow/Haul Mode on page 3 ‑ 42 . When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, consider the following: Engine coolant will boil at a lower temperature than at normal altitudes. If the engine is turned off immediately after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, th[...]

  • Page 412

    4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). 5. If the vehicle is four-wheel-drive and has a two-speed transfer case, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear and not in N (Neutral). 6. Release the brake pedal. { W ARNING: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If the engine has been left running, the vehicle can move suddenly . Y ou or others could be injured. T o be sure the vehicle will not move, even when on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow . Always put the shift lever fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. If the[...]

  • Page 413

    T railer Wiring Harness Heavy-Duty T railer Wiring Harness Package The vehicle has a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer connector attached to the rear bumper beam next to the integrated trailer hitch. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits: . Y ellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal . Dark Green: Right Stop/T urn Signal . Brown: T aillamps . White: Ground . Light Green: Back-up Lamps . Red: Battery Feed* . Dark Blue: T railer Brake* *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center , but the wires are not connected. They should be connected by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center . If charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery , p[...]

  • Page 414

    Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller . The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller . The harness contains the following wires: . Dark Blue: Brake Signal to T railer Connector . Red/Black: Battery . Light Blue/White: Brake Switch . White: Ground It should be installed by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center . If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an aftermarket trailer brake controller is instal[...]

  • Page 415

    Section 6 Service and Appearance Care Service ......... ............................... ..... 6-3 Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 California Proposition 65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 California Perchlorate Materials R e q u i r e m e n t s ................................. 6 - 4 Doing Y our Own Service Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5 Fuel .............................................. ... 6-5 Gasoline Octane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Gasoline Specification[...]

  • Page 416

    Section 6 Service and Appearance Care T ire Pressure Monitor System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-64 T ire Pressure Monitor Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-65 T ire Inspection and Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-68 When It Is T ime for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Buying New T ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-71 Different Size Tires and Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 Uniform Tire Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-73 Wheel Alignment and T ire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 T ire Chains . . . .[...]

  • Page 417

    Service For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer . Y ou will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Accessories and Modifications When non ‐ dealer/non ‐ retailer accessories are added to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and safety , including such things as airbags, braking, stability , ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability , and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty . Damage to vehicle components resulting from the i[...]

  • Page 418

    California Proposition 65 W arning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems, many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary . For additional information, see www .dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. Doing Y our Own Servi[...]

  • Page 419

    Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Record on page 7 ‑ 15 . Adding Equipment to the Outside of the V ehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. T o help keep the engine clean and maintain optimum vehicle performance, we recommend the use of gasoline advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Look for[...]

  • Page 420

    Gasoline Octane Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane rating of 87 or higher . If the octane rating is less than 87, an audible knocking noise, commonly referred to as spark knock, might be heard when driving. If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. If heavy knocking is heard when using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher , the engine needs service. Gasoline Specifications At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/ CGSB ‐ 3.5 or 3.51 1 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of g[...]

  • Page 421

    Additives T o provide cleaner air , all gasolines in the United States are now required to contain additives that help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from forming, allowing the emission control system to work properly . In most cases, nothing should have to be added to the fuel. However , some gasolines contain only the minimum amount of additive required to meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations. T o help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean, or if the vehicle experiences problems due to dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. For customers who do not use TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline regularly , one bottle[...]

  • Page 422

    Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) This vehicle can use either unleaded gasoline or 85% ethanol fuel (E85). We encourage the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “ renewable ” fuel, meaning it is made from renewable sources such as corn and other crops. Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pump available. The U.S. Department of Energy has an alternative fuels website (www .eere.energy .gov/afdc/infrastructure/locator .html) that can help you find E85 fuel. Those stations that do have E85 should have a label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel if the ethanol content is greater than 85%. At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Spec[...]

  • Page 423

    E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so you will need to refill the fuel tank more often when using E85 than when you are using gasoline. See Filling the T ank on page 6 ‑ 10 . Notice: Some additives are not compatible with E85 fuel and can harm the vehicle's fuel system. Do not add anything to E85. Damage caused by additives would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be covered under the vehicle warranty . Fuels in Foreign Countries If you plan on driving i[...]

  • Page 424

    Filling the T ank { W ARNING: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. T o help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the fuel pump island. Turn off the engine when refueling. Do not smoke near fuel or when refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehicle. If t[...]

  • Page 425

    { W ARNING: Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly . If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather . Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way . Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See Washing Y our V ehicle on page 6 ‑ 99 . When replacing the fuel cap, insert the tether in its hole before tightening the cap. T urn the fuel cap clockwise [...]

  • Page 426

    Filling a Portable Fuel Container { W ARNING: Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in the vehicle. Static electricity discharge from the container can ignite the fuel vapor . Y ou can be badly burned and the vehicle damaged if this occurs. T o help avoid injury to you and others: . Dispense fuel only into approved containers. . Do not fill a container while it is inside a vehicle, in a vehicle's trunk, pickup bed, or on any surface other than the ground. . Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the inside of the fill opening before operating the nozzle. Contact should be maintained until the filling is complete. . Do not smoke while pumping fuel. . Do not use a cellular phone[...]

  • Page 427

    Hood Release T o open the hood: 1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release, near the center of the grille. 3. Push the secondary hood release to the right. 4. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly . Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position, pause, then push the front center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood. 6-13[...]

  • Page 428

    Engine Compartment Overview When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (6.0L similar), here is what you will see: 6-14[...]

  • Page 429

    A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6 ‑ 20 . B. Coolant Surge T ank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 6 ‑ 26 . C. Remote Positive (+) T erminal. See Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 40 . D. Battery on page 6 ‑ 39 . E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “ When to Add Engine Oil ” under Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16 . F . Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “ Checking the Fluid Level ” under Automatic T ransmission Fluid on page 6 ‑ 22 . G. Remote Negative ( − ) T erminal (Out of View). See Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 40 . H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “ Checking Engine Oil ” under Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16 . I. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System on page 6 ?[...]

  • Page 430

    Engine Oil Checking Engine Oil It is a good idea to check the engine oil level at each fuel fill. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground. The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14 for the location of the engine oil dipstick. 1. T urn off the engine and give the oil several minutes to drain back into the oil pan. If this is not done, the oil dipstick might not show the actual level. 2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel or cloth, then push it back in all the way . Remove it again, keeping the tip down, and check the level. When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is b[...]

  • Page 431

    See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through. What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things: . GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. . SAE 5W-30 SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity , or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. . American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container . This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the Am[...]

  • Page 432

    Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty . Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter . This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably . For the oil life system to work properly , th[...]

  • Page 433

    Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. T o reset the Engine Oil Life System on most vehicles: 1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display . See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 43 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 4 ‑ 51 . 2. Press and hold the SET/RESET button on the DIC, or the trip odometer reset stem if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, for more than five seconds. The oil life will change to 100%. On all vehicles, the Engine Oil Life System can be reset as follows: 1. T urn the ig[...]

  • Page 434

    Engine Air Cleaner/Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter . Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 for more information. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter T o inspect the air cleaner/filter , remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the engine [...]

  • Page 435

    3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and the housing. 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter . 6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. { W ARNING: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. Use caution when working on the engine and do not drive with the air cleaner/filter off. 6-21[...]

  • Page 436

    Automatic T ransmission Fluid When to Check and Change Automatic T ransmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If you suspect a small leak, then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level. However , if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer/retailer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further . Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle's warranty . Always use the automatic tra[...]

  • Page 437

    4. Allow the engine to idle (500 – 800 rpm) for at least one minute. Slowly release the brake pedal. 5. Keep the engine running and press the T rip/Fuel button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP (T ransmission T emperature) displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC). 6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and perform the appropriate check procedure. If the TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached. Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a[...]

  • Page 438

    5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band, add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill. 6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 160°F to 200°F (71°C to 93°C). 7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way , then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C). The hot check is the most [...]

  • Page 439

    3. Install the dipstick by pushing it back in all the way , wait three seconds, and then pull it back out again. 4. Check both sides of the dipstick and read the lower level. Repeat the check procedure to verify the reading. 5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band. If the fluid level is low , add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill. 6. If the fluid level is in th[...]

  • Page 440

    Cooling System The cooling system allows the engine to maintain the correct working temperature. 5.3L Engine shown, 6.0L Engine similar A. Coolant Surge T ank B. Coolant Surge T ank Pressure Cap C. Engine Cooling Fan(s) { W ARNING: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury . Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { W ARNING: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. G[...]

  • Page 441

    Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner , at 50 000 km (30,000 miles) or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Always use DEX-COOL ® (silicate-free) coolant in the vehicle. Engine Coolant The cooling system in the vehicle is filled with DEX-COOL ® engine coolant. This coolant is designed to remain in the vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles (240 000 km), whichever occurs first. The following explains the cooling system and how to check and add coolant when it is low . If there is a problem with engine o[...]

  • Page 442

    . Protects against rust and corrosion. . Will not damage aluminum parts. . Helps keep the proper engine temperature. Notice: If an improper coolant mixture is used, the engine could overheat and be badly damaged. The repair cost would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . T oo much water in the mixture can freeze and crack the engine, radiator , heater core, and other parts. Notice: If extra inhibitors and/or additives are used in the vehicle's cooling system, the vehicle could be damaged. Use only the proper mixture of the engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 for more information. Checking Coolant The ve[...]

  • Page 443

    How to Add Coolant to the Surge T ank { W ARNING: Y ou can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged. { W ARNING: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury . Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { W ARNING: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly . They are unde[...]

  • Page 444

    T urn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it. 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark. 4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. W atch out for the engine cooling fan. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower . If the level is lower , add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark. 6-30[...]

  • Page 445

    5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. 6. V erify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary , repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6. Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occur . Be sure the cap is properly and tightly secured. Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle's instrument panel. See Engine Coolant T emperature Gage on page 4 ‑ 34 . In addition, ENGINE OVERHEA TED STOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEA TED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE POWER IS RED[...]

  • Page 446

    If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment { W ARNING: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly , even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. T urn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. W ait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. Y ou or others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 6 ‑ 33 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency[...]

  • Page 447

    If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally . If the warning continues, pull over , stop, and park the vehicle right away . If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also, see “ Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ” later in this section. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated en[...]

  • Page 448

    Power Steering Fluid See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14 for reservoir location. When to Check Power Steering Fluid It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected and repaired. How to Check Power Steering Fluid T o check the power steering fluid: 1. T urn the key off and let the engine compartment cool down. 2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean. 3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a clean rag. 4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it. 5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid le[...]

  • Page 449

    Windshield W asher Fluid What to Use When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be sure to read the manufacturer's instructions before use. Use a fluid that has sufficient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing. Adding W asher Fluid The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC that comes on when the washer fluid is low . The message is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each ignition cycle. When the W ASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID message displays, you will need to add washer fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir . Open the cap with the washer symbol on it. Add washer fluid until the tank is full. See Engine Compartm[...]

  • Page 450

    Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14 for the location of the reservoir . There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: . The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear . When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. . A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are worn, the[...]

  • Page 451

    Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir . See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14 . The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark. What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container . See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir . { W ARNING: With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic sys[...]

  • Page 452

    Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly . { W ARNING: The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This[...]

  • Page 453

    Battery Refer to the replacement number on the original battery label when a new battery is needed. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 6 ‑ 14 for battery location. { DANGER: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling. V ehicle Storage { W ARNING: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. Y ou can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on page 6 ‑ 40 for tips on working around a battery without getting hurt. Infrequent Usage: Remove the black, negative ( − ) cable from the battery to keep the batt[...]

  • Page 454

    Jump Starting If the vehicle's battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely . { W ARNING: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: . They contain acid that can burn you. . They contain gas that can explode or ignite. . They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly , some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty . T rying to start the vehicle by pushing or pulling it will not work, and it could damage [...]

  • Page 455

    Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty . Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. 3. T urn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets. T urn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This avoids sparks and helps save both batteries. And it could save the radio! 4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive (+) and negative ( − ) terminal locations on that vehicle. Y our vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump startin[...]

  • Page 456

    { W ARNING: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { W ARNING: Using an open flame near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water . Y ou do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low , add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you. Do not get[...]

  • Page 457

    6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery . Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery . Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal of the good battery . Use a remote negative ( − ) terminal if the vehicle has one. Do not let the other end touch anything until the next step. The other end of the negative ( − ) cable does not go to the dead battery . It goes to a heavy , unpainted metal engine part or to the remote ne[...]

  • Page 458

    Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order , electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order , making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. Jumper Cable Removal A. Heavy , Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative ( − ) T erminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative ( − ) T erminals C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) T erminal T o disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle that had the bad ba[...]

  • Page 459

    Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during production. They are not filled to reach a certain level. When checking the fluid level on any axle, variations in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences between the minimum and the maximum fluid volume. Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained back to the sump area[...]

  • Page 460

    What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . Four-Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles. There are two additional systems that need lubrication. T ransfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant Active T ransfer Case A. Fill Plug B. Drain Plug T o get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. If the level is below the bottom of th[...]

  • Page 461

    When to Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 . What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant T o get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. A : Fill Plug B : Drain Plug . When the differential is cold, add eno[...]

  • Page 462

    Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. However , if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim of the headlamps can be affected and adjustment can be necessary . If oncoming vehicles flash their high beams at you, this can mean the vertical aim of your headlamps needs to be adjusted. It is recommended that the vehicle is taken to your dealer/retailer for service if the headlamps need to be adjusted. It is possible however , to re-aim the headlamps as described. The vehicle should: . Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall. . Have al[...]

  • Page 463

    T o adjust the vertical aim: 1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 6 ‑ 13 for more information. 2. Locate the aim dot on the lens of the low ‐ beam headlamp. 3. Record the distance from the ground to the aim dot on the low ‐ beam headlamp. 4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to the headlamp. 6. T urn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of card[...]

  • Page 464

    7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which are under the hood near each headlamp assembly . The adjustment screw can be turned with a E8 T orx ® socket. 8. T urn the vertical aiming screw until the headlamp beam is aimed to the horizontal tape line. T urn it clockwise or counterclockwise to raise or lower the angle of the beam. 9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp. Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bul[...]

  • Page 465

    Halogen Bulbs { W ARNING: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. Y ou or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. T aillamps, T urn Signal, Sidemarker , Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps A. Stoplamp/T urn Signal/T aillamp B. Back-up Lamp C. Stoplamp/T urn Signal/T aillamp D. Sidemarker Lamp T o replace one of these bulbs, do the following: 1. Open the tailgate. See T ailgate on page 3 ‑ 22 for more information. 2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly . 3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until you disengage the outer pins on the taillamp assembly from the vehicle. 4. Press the releas[...]

  • Page 466

    6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert the bulb socket into the taillamp assembly . T urn the bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks. 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly making sure to line up the pins with the vehicle. License Plate Lamp T o replace one of these bulbs: 1. Reach under the rear bumper for the bulb socket. 2. T urn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb socket out of the connector . 3. Pull the old bulb from the bulb socket, keeping the bulb straight as you pull it out. 4. Install the new bulb. 5. Reverse Steps 1 through 3 to reinstall the bulb socket. Replacement Bulbs Exterior Lamp Bulb Number Back-up Lamp 7441 License Plate [...]

  • Page 467

    Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 7 ‑ 3 . Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. T o replace the wiper blade assembly , do the following: 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield. 2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade, and rotate the blade assembly away from the arm connector . 3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position. For the proper type and size, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 13 . 6-53[...]

  • Page 468

    Tires Y our new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer . If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your vehicle W arranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer . { W ARNING: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. . Overloading your vehicle's tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. Y ou could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading the V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 . . Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury . Check all tires frequently to maintain the[...]

  • Page 469

    Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a typical P ‐ Metric and a L T ‐ Metric tire sidewall. Passenger (P ‐ Metric) Tire (A) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “ T ire Size ” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performanc e Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specif[...]

  • Page 470

    (F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) : T ire manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three performance factors: treadwear , traction, and temperature resistance . For more information, see Uniform Tire Quality Grading on page 6 ‑ 73 . (G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load. For information on recommen ded tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 62 and Loading the V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 . Light T ruck (L T -Metric) Tire (A) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire's width, height, aspect ratio, construct[...]

  • Page 471

    (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performanc e Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM's specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM's TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 62 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 . (D) DOT (Department of T ransportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Dep[...]

  • Page 472

    Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size. Passenger (P ‐ Metric) Tire (A) Passenger (P ‐ Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. T ire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width : The three ‐ digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio : A two ‐ digit number that indicates the tire height ‐ to ‐ width measurem ents. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the tire illustration, it would mean that the tire&apos[...]

  • Page 473

    Light T ruck (L T ‐ Metric) Tire (A) Light T ruck (L T ‐ Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters L T as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. T ire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width : The three ‐ digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio : A two ‐ digit number that indicates the tire height ‐ to ‐ width measurem ents. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the light truck (L T ‐ Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that the tire's sidewall is 75 percent as high[...]

  • Page 474

    Tire T erminology and Definitions Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Accessory Weight : This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire's height to its width. Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrappe[...]

  • Page 475

    Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure. Light T ruck (L T ‐ Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Maximum Loaded V ehicle Weight : The sum of cur[...]

  • Page 476

    Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. T raction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. T read : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. T readwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 ‑ 70 . UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards) : A tire information system that provides consumers with ratings for a tire's traction, temperature, and treadwear . Ratings are determined by tire manufacture rs using [...]

  • Page 477

    If your tires have too much air (over ‐ infla tion), you can get the following: . Unusual wear . Poor handling . Rough ride . Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific T ire and Loading Information label is attached to your vehicle. This label shows your vehicle's original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressures for your tires when they are cold. The recommended cold tire inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle's maximum load carrying capacity . For additional information regarding how much weight your vehicle can carry , and an example of the Tire and Loading Information label, see Loadin[...]

  • Page 478

    If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck the tire pressure with the tire gage. Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt and moisture. Tire Pressure Monitor System The T ire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your vehicle's tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer o[...]

  • Page 479

    replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly . See Tire Pressure Monitor Operation on page 6 ‑ 65 for additional information. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) and Industry and Science Canada See Radio Frequency Statement on page 8 ‑ 19 for information regarding Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and RSS-210/21 1 of Industry and Science Canada. Tire Pressure Monitor Operation This vehicle may have a T ire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mount[...]

  • Page 480

    The low tire pressure warning light may come on in cool weather when the vehicle is first started, and then turn off as you start to drive. This could be an early indicator that the air pressure in the tire(s) are getting low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure. A Tire and Loading Information label, attached to your vehicle, shows the size of your vehicle's original equipment tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle's tires when they are cold. See Loading the V ehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 , for an example of the Tire and Loading Information label and its location on your vehicle. Also see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 62 . Y our vehicle's TPMS[...]

  • Page 481

    . One or more TPMS sensors are missing or damaged. The DIC message and the TPMS malfunction light should go off when the TPMS sensors are installed and the sensor matching process is performed successfully . See your dealer/retailer for service. . Replacement tires or wheels do not match your vehicle's original equipment tires or wheels. Tires and wheels other than those recommended for your vehicle could prevent the TPMS from functioning properly . See Buying New Tires on page 6 ‑ 71 . . Operating electronic devices or being near facilities using radio wave frequencies similar to the TPMS could cause the TPMS sensors to malfunction. If the TPMS is not functioning it cannot detect or [...]

  • Page 482

    Y ou have two minutes to match the first tire/wheel position, and five minutes overall to match all four tire/ wheel positions. If it takes longer than two minutes, to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the matching process stops and you need to start over . The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below: 1. Set the parking brake. 2. T urn the ignition switch to ON/RUN with the engine off. 3. Press the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter's lock and unlock buttons at the same time for approximately five seconds. The horn sounds twice to signal the receiver is in relearn mode and TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message displays[...]

  • Page 483

    The purpose of a regular tire rotation is to achieve a uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. This will ensure that your vehicle continues to perform most like it did when the tires were new . Any time you notice unusual wear , rotate your tires as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 6 ‑ 70 and Wheel Replacement on page 6 ‑ 74 . When rotating your vehicle's tires, always use the correct rotation pattern shown here. Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation. After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front and rear inflation pressures as shown on the T ire and Loading Information[...]

  • Page 484

    Make sure the spare tire is stored securely . Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves, tighten the cable. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and T ools on page 6 ‑ 92 . When It Is Time for New T ires V arious factors, such as maintenance, temperatures, driving speeds, vehicle loading, and road conditions, influence when you need new tires. One way to tell when it is time for new tires is to check the treadwear indicators, which appear when your tires have only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) or less of tread remaining. Some commercial truck tires may not have treadwear indicators. Y ou need new tires if any of the following statements are true: . Y ou can see the indicators at th[...]

  • Page 485

    Buying New Tires GM has developed and matched specific tires for your vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on your vehicle, when it was new , were designed to meet General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification (TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with the same TPC Spec rating. This way , your vehicle will continue to have tires that are designed to give the same performance and vehicle safety , during normal use, as the original tires. GM's exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a dozen critical specifications that impact the overall performance of your vehicle, including brake system performance, ride a[...]

  • Page 486

    { W ARNING: If you use bias-ply tires on the vehicle, the wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel could fail suddenly , causing a crash. Use only radial-ply tires with the wheels on the vehicle. If you must replace your vehicle's tires with those that do not have a TPC Spec number , make sure they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and construction type (radial and bias ‐ belted tires) as your vehicle's original tires. V ehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system may give an inaccurate low ‐ pressure warning if non ‐ TPC spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non ‐ TPC Spec rated tires may give a lo[...]

  • Page 487

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: T readwear 200 T raction AA T emperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway T raffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear , traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform T ire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver , or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal [...]

  • Page 488

    T raction – AA, A, B, C The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance. T emperature – A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temper[...]

  • Page 489

    Y our dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity , diameter , width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or T ire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way , you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for your vehicle. { W ARNING: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose contr[...]

  • Page 490

    Tire Chains { W ARNING: If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance. T ire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer's instructions. T o help avoid damage to your vehi[...]

  • Page 491

    If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle's tires properly . If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly . But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. T ake your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly . Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traffic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid.[...]

  • Page 492

    Changing a Flat Tire If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 4 ‑ 3 . { W ARNING: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. Y ou and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. T o help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly . 2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle with a N (Neutral) transfer case position, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). (Continued) W ARNI[...]

  • Page 493

    A. Wheel Block B. Flat T ire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire. Removing the Spare Tire and T ools The jack and the wheel blocks are located under a cover near the passenger side rear seat. Rear Seat (Passenger Side) Jack Cover 1. Remove the jack cover by turning the two wing nuts one-quarter turn counterclockwise and pulling the jack cover off. 6-79[...]

  • Page 494

    A. Wheel Blocks B. Jack Knob C. Wing Nut D. Retaining Hook E. Jack F . Mounting Bracket 2. Release the jack (E) from the mounting bracket (F) by turning the jack knob (B) on the jack counterclockwise to release the jack from the mounting bracket. 3. Remove the wheel blocks (A) attached to the jack (E) by turning the wing nut (C) counterclockwise. Place the wheel blocks where needed as indicated in previously in this section. The tools for changing a flat tire are located in the passenger's side top-box storage unit. T o remove the tools, do the following: 1. Open the top door on the passenger's side top-box storage unit. Use the ignition/door key to unlock it if it is locked. See T[...]

  • Page 495

    T o access the spare tire: A. Spare T ire (V alve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist Cable D. T ire/Wheel Retainer E. Hoist Shaft F . Hoist End of Extension T ool G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole H. Wheel Wrench I. Jack Handle Extension(s) J. Spare Tire Lock 1. Open the hoist shaft access cover on the bumper to access the spare tire lock (J). 2. T o remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition key , turn it clockwise and pull it straight out. 3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I) and wheel wrench (H) as shown. 6-81[...]

  • Page 496

    4. Insert the open end of the extension (F) through the hole in the rear bumper (G) (hoist shaft access hole). Be sure the hoist end (F) of the extension connects to the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire. Do not use the chiseled end of the wheel wrench. 5. T urn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower . See Secondary Latch System on page 6 ‑ 89 for more information. 6. Use the wheel wrench hook that al[...]

  • Page 497

    7. T ilt the tire with slack in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer (D). Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the latch. When the retainer is separated from the guide pin, tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and guide pin. 8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. 6-83[...]

  • Page 498

    Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire Use the following pictures and instructions to remove the flat tire and raise the vehicle. The tools needed are the jack (A), the wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E). 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 78 for more information. 2. If the vehicle has a center cap, place the chiseled end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out. If the vehicle has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be retained in the hub cap after it is removed[...]

  • Page 499

    3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. T urn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. Jacking Locations (Overall View) A. Front Position B. Rear Position { W ARNING: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. { W ARNING: Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly positioned can damage the vehicle and even make the vehicle fall. T o help avoid personal injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the jack lift head into the proper location before raising the vehicle. 4. Positi[...]

  • Page 500

    Front Position Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and only one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack handle to the jack (A). Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire near the front body mount as shown. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground. Rear Position Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and both jack handle extensions. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle exten[...]

  • Page 501

    5. Remove all the wheel nuts. 6. T ake off the flat tire. { W ARNING: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) In an emergency , use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later , if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 6 ‑ 78 . 7. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. 8. Install the spare tire. 6-87[...]

  • Page 502

    { W ARNING: Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle's wheel could fall off, causing a crash. 9. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the spare tire. 10. T ighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the wheel wrench to tighten the wheel nuts until the wheel is held against the hub. 1 1. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely . { W ARNING: Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification after repl[...]

  • Page 503

    When you reinstall the full-size wheel and tire, you must also reinstall the either the center cap or the bolt-on hub cap, depending on what your vehicle has. . If you are reinstalling a center cap, line up the tab on the center cap with the slot on the wheel. The cap only goes in one way . Place the cap on the wheel and press until it snaps into place. . If you are reinstalling bolt-on hub caps, line up the plastic nut caps with the wheel nuts and tighten them clockwise by hand to get them started. Continue tightening with the wheel wrench until snug. Secondary Latch System Y our vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to s[...]

  • Page 504

    3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench counterclockwise three or four turns. 4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and T ools on page 6 ‑ 79 . 5. If the spare does not lower , turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with the backs facing each other . 7. Place the bottom edge of the jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B), separating them so that the jack is balanced securely . 8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under the vehicle towa[...]

  • Page 505

    9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 10. T urn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting. 1 1. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. 12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable. { W ARNING: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely , make sure no one is behind you or on either side of [...]

  • Page 506

    Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and T ools { W ARNING: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury . In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon as possible. Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier . A. Spare T ire/Flat Tire (V alve Stem Pointed Down) B. Hoist Assembly C. Hoist Cable D. T ire[...]

  • Page 507

    1. Put the tire (A) on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear . 2. T ilt the tire. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (D) from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the center of the wheel. T ilt the retainer down through the center wheel opening. 6-93[...]

  • Page 508

    3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (I) and wheel wrench (H) as shown. 4. Insert the open end of the extension (F) through the hole in the rear bumper (G) (hoist shaft access hole). 5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel and is centered in the wheel opening. 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. Y ou cannot overtighten the cable. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely . Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. 6-94[...]

  • Page 509

    8. Reinstall the spare tire lock. 9. Close the hoist shaft access cover . T o store the tools, follow these steps: 1. Return the tools to the tool bag and place it back in the top ‐ box storage unit. 2. Assemble the wheel blocks and jack together with the wing nut by reversing Step 2 under Removing the Spare Tire and T ools on page 6 ‑ 79 3. Replace the jack cover and tighten the jack-cover wing nuts. Spare Tire Y our vehicle, when new , had a fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly . See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 6 ‑ 62 and Loading the Vehicle on page 5 ‑ 32 for information regarding proper tire inflation and [...]

  • Page 510

    Appearance Care Interior Cleaning The vehicle's interior will continue to look its best if it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust and dirt can accumulate on the upholstery . Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather , and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove particles from the upholstery . It is important to keep the upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible. The vehicle's interior may experience extremes of heat that could cause stains to set rapidly . Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home fur[...]

  • Page 511

    . Laundry detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers can leave residue that streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide. Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. . T oo much cleaner that saturates the upholstery . . Organic solvents such as naptha, alcohol, etc. that can damage the vehicle's interior . Fabric/Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of[...]

  • Page 512

    Leather A soft cloth dampened with water can be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary , a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally . Do not use heat to dry . Never use steam to clean leather . Never use spot lifters or spot removers on leather . Many commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect leather may permanently change the appearance and feel of the leather and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle's interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform ma[...]

  • Page 513

    Weatherstrips Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last longer , seal better , and not stick or squeak. Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold, damp weather frequent application may be required. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . W ashing Y our V ehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle's finish is to keep it clean by washing it often. Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty . Do not wash [...]

  • Page 514

    Finish Care Occasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicle by hand may be necessary to remove residue from the paint finish. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer . If the vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish, the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish. Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice mel[...]

  • Page 515

    Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and T rim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water . Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly , dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle's chrome with soap and water after exposure. Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners th[...]

  • Page 516

    Tires T o clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner . Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing products on the vehicle may damage the paint finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing, always wipe off any overspray from all painted surfaces on the vehicle. Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty . Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be r[...]

  • Page 517

    V ehicle Identification V ehicle Identification Number (VIN) This legal identifier is in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from outside. The VIN also appears on the Certification/T ire and Service Parts labels and certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code identifies the vehicle's engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “ Engine Specifications ” under Capacities and Specifications on page 6 ‑ 1 12 for the vehicle's engine code. Service Parts Identification Label This label, on the inside of the glove box, has the followi[...]

  • Page 518

    Electrical System Add-On Electrical Equipment Notice: Do not add anything electrical to the vehicle unless you check with your dealer/retailer first. Some electrical equipment can damage the vehicle and the damage would not be covered by the vehicle's warranty . Some add-on electrical equipment can keep other components from working as they should. Add-on equipment can drain the vehicle battery , even if the vehicle is not operating. The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle on page 2 ‑ 76 and Adding Equipment to Y our Airbag-Equipped V ehicle on page 2 ‑ 76 . Windshield Wiper Fuses The[...]

  • Page 519

    Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block. The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown. Fuses Usage 1 Rear Seats 2 Rear Accessory Power Outlet 3 Steering Wheel Controls Backlight 4 Driver Door Module 5 Dome Lamps, Driver Side T urn Signal 6 Driver Side T urn Signal, Stoplamp 7 Instrument Panel Back Lighting 8 Passenger Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp 6-105[...]

  • Page 520

    Fuses Usage 9 Passenger Door Module, Driver Unlock 10 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature) 1 1 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature) 12 Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted Stoplamp 13 Rear Climate Controls 14 Power Mirror 15 Body Control Module (BCM) 16 Accessory Power Outlets 17 Interior Lamps 18 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature) 19 Rear Seat Entertainment 20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, Power Liftgate 21 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature) 22 Driver Information Center (DIC) Fuses Usage 23 Rear Wiper 24 Cooled Seats 25 Driver Seat Module, Remote Keyless Entry System 26 Driver Power Door Lock (Unlock Feature) Circuit Breaker Usage L T DR Driver Side Power Window Circuit Breaker Harness Connector Usage [...]

  • Page 521

    Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. T op View Harness Connector Usage BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 Harness Connector Usage HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option Upfitter Harness Connector Circuit Breaker Usage CB1 Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker CB2 Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker CB3 Driver Seat Circuit Breaker CB4 Rear Sliding Window 6-107[...]

  • Page 522

    Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. T o remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. 6-108[...]

  • Page 523

    Fuses Usage 1 Right T railer Stop/T urn Lamp 2 Electronic Stability Suspension Control, Automatic Level Control Exhaust 3 Left T railer Stop/T urn Lamp 4 Engine Controls 5 Engine Control Module, Throttle Control 6 T railer Brake Controller 7 Front W asher 8 Oxygen Sensors 9 Antilock Brakes System 2 10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 1 1 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp 12 Engine Control Module (Battery) 13 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Right Side) 14 T ransmission Control Module (Battery) Fuses Usage 15 V ehicle Back-up Lamps 16 Passenger Side Low-Beam Headlamp 17 Air Conditioning Compressor 18 Oxygen Sensors 19 Transmission Controls (Ignition) 20 Fuel Pump 21 Fuel System Control Module 22 Headlamp Was[...]

  • Page 524

    Fuses Usage 30 Passenger Side High-Beam Headlamp 31 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) 32 Driver Side High-Beam Headlamp 33 Daytime Running Lights 2 34 Sunroof 35 Key Ignition System, Theft Deterrent System 36 Windshield Wiper 37 SEO B2 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 38 Electric Adjustable Pedals 39 Climate Controls (Battery) 40 Airbag System (Ignition) 41 Amplifier 42 Audio System 43 Miscellaneous (Ignition), Cruise Control Fuses Usage 44 Liftgate Release 45 Airbag System (Battery) 46 Instrument Panel Cluster 47 Not Used 48 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition) 49 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp 50 Rear Defogger 51 Heated Mirrors 52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 53 Cigarette Lighter , Auxiliary Power Outl[...]

  • Page 525

    J-Case Fuses Usage 57 Cooling Fan 1 58 Automatic Level Control Compressor 59 Heavy Duty Antilock Brake System 60 Cooling Fan 2 61 Antilock Brake System 1 62 Starter 63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) 64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 65 Electric Running Boards 66 Heated Windshield Washer System 67 Transfer Case 68 Stud 1 (Trailer Connector Battery Power) 69 Mid-Bussed Electrical Center 1 70 Climate Control Blower 71 Power Liftgate Module 72 Left Bussed Electrical Center 2 Relays Usage F AN HI Cooling Fan High Speed F AN LO Cooling Fan Low Speed F AN CNTRL Cooling Fan Control HDLP LO/HID Low-Beam Headlamp FOG LAMP Front Fog Lamps A/C CMPRSR Air Conditioning Compressor STRTR Starter PWR/TRN Powertrai[...]

  • Page 526

    Capacities and Specifications The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 for more information. Application Capacities English Metric Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 5.3L V8, 6.2L V8 16.8 qt 15.9 L Engine Oil with Filter 5.3L V8, 6.2L V8 6.0 qt † 5.7 L † Fuel T ank 31.5 gal 1 19.2 L T ransmission Fluid (Pan Removal and Filter Replacement) 6.0 qt 5.7 L T ransfer Case Fluid 1.6 qt 1.5 L Wheel Nut T orque 140 lb ft 190 [...]

  • Page 527

    Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code T ransmission Spark Plug Gap 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management ™ (Iron) (LMG) 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.02 mm) 6.2L V8 with Active Fuel Management ™ (L9H) 2 Automatic 0.040 in (1.02 mm) 6-1 13[...]

  • Page 528

    2 NOTES 6-1 14[...]

  • Page 529

    Section 7 Maintenance Schedule Maintenance Schedule .. ............... ........... 7-2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Scheduled Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Owner Checks and Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 1 Maintenance Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 Maintenance Record . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15 7-1[...]

  • Page 530

    Maintenance Schedule Introduction Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, recommended fluids, and lubricants are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty . Proper vehicle maintenance helps to keep the vehicle in good working condition, improves fuel economy , and reduces vehicle emissions for better air quality . Because of all the different ways people use vehicles, maintenance needs vary . The vehicle might need more frequent checks and services. Please read the information under Scheduled Maintenance. T o keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/ret[...]

  • Page 531

    At your General Motors dealer/retailer , you can be certain that you will receive the highest level of service available. Y our dealer/retailer has specially trained service technicians, uses genuine GM replacement parts, as well as, up to date tools and equipment to ensure fast and accurate diagnostics. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 7 ‑ 13 . We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer/retailer . Rotation of New Tires T o maintain ride, handling, and performance of the vehicle, it is important that the first rotation service for new tires be p[...]

  • Page 532

    When the Change Engine Oil Soon message displays, certain services, checks, and inspections are required. The services described for Maintenance I should be performed at every engine oil change. The services described for Maintenance II should be performed when: . Maintenance I was performed the last time the engine oil was changed. . It has been 10 months or more since the Change Engine Oil Soon message has displayed or since the last service. Maintenance I . Change engine oil and filter . See Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16 . An Emission Control Service. . Engine coolant level check. See Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 27 . . Windshield washer fluid level check. See Windshield Washer Fluid on pag[...]

  • Page 533

    . Body hinges and latches, key lock cylinders, folding seat hardware, midgate hinges, and tailgate hinges, linkage, and handle pivot points lubrication. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 7 ‑ 1 1 . More frequent lubrication may be required when vehicle is exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth makes them last longer , seal better , and not stick or squeak. . Restraint system component check. See Checking the Restraint Systems on page 2 ‑ 78 . . Automatic transmission fluid level check and adding fluid, if needed. See Automatic T ransmission Fluid on page 6 ‑ 22 . . Engine air cleaner filter inspection. See Engine Air [...]

  • Page 534

    . Accelerator pedal check for damage, high effort, or binding. Replace if needed. . Hood support gas strut inspection for signs of wear , corrosion, cracks, loss of lubricant, or other damage. Check the hold open ability of the gas strut. If necessary , replace with genuine parts from your dealer/retailer . First Engine Oil Change After Every 40 000 km/25,000 Miles . Fuel system inspection for damage or leaks. First Engine Oil Change After Every 80 000 km/50,000 Miles . Engine air cleaner filter replacement. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 6 ‑ 20 . . Automatic transmission fluid change (severe service) for vehicle mainly driven in heavy city traffic in hot weather , in hilly or mount[...]

  • Page 535

    First Engine Oil Change After Every 160 000 km/100,000 Miles . Automatic transmission fluid change (normal service). See Automatic T ransmission Fluid on page 6 ‑ 22 . . Four ‐ wheel drive only: Transfer case fluid change (normal service). Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear , and free of debris. During any maintenance, if a power washer is used to clean mud and dirt from the underbody , care should be taken to not directly spray the transfer case output seals. High pressure water can overcome the seals and contaminate the transfer case fluid. Contaminated fluid will decrease the life of the transfer case a[...]

  • Page 536

    Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter . Reset oil life system. • • Engine coolant level check. • • Windshield washer fluid level check. • • T ire inflation pressures check. • • T ire wear inspection. • • Rotate tires. • • Fluids visual leak check. • • Engine air cleaner filter inspection (vehicles driven in dusty conditions only). • • Brake system inspection. • • Chassis components lubrication. • Steering and suspension inspection. • Engine cooling system inspection. • Windshield wiper blades inspection. • Body components lubrication. • Restraint system components check. • Automatic transmission[...]

  • Page 537

    Owner Checks and Services Starter Switch Check { W ARNING: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly . If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 3 ‑ 50 . Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. T ry to start the engine in each gear . The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service. Automatic T ransmission Shift Lock Control System Chec[...]

  • Page 538

    Ignition T ransmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position. . The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park). . The ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF . Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. Parking Brake and Automatic T ransmission P (Park) Mechanism Check { W ARNING: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. Y ou or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is (Continued) W ARNING: (Continued) room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should[...]

  • Page 539

    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number , or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer . Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. T o determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle's engine, see Engine Oil on page 6 ‑ 16 . Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 6 ‑ 27 . Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in Canada 89021320). Windshield W asher Opt[...]

  • Page 540

    Usage Fluid/Lubricant Front Axle SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021671, in Canada 89021672). Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 99861 15. T ransfer Case DEXRON ® -VI Automatic T ransmission Fluid. Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One-Piece Propshaft Spline (T wo-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.) Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in Canada 1095351 1) or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Outer T ailgate Handle Pivot Points Multi-Purpose Lubric[...]

  • Page 541

    Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number , or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer . Maintenance Replacement Parts Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner /Filter Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C* High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C Oil Filter 5.3L V8, 6.2L V8 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 5.3L V8, 6.2L V8 12621258 41-1 10 Wiper Blades Front – 21.6 in (55.0 cm) 25877402 — *15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted. 7-13[...]

  • Page 542

    Engine Drive Belt Routing 7-14[...]

  • Page 543

    Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-15[...]

  • Page 544

    Maintenance Record (cont'd) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-16[...]

  • Page 545

    Maintenance Record (cont'd) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-17[...]

  • Page 546

    Maintenance Record (cont'd) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Services Performed 7-18[...]

  • Page 547

    Section 8 Customer Assistance Information Customer Assistance and Information . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Customer Assistance for T ext T elephone (TTY) Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Customer Assistance Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Roadside Assistance Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Scheduling Service Appointments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Courtesy T ransportation Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Collision Damage Repair . . . [...]

  • Page 548

    Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Y our satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally , any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer's sales or service departments. Sometimes, however , despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur . If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE : Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally , concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts man[...]

  • Page 549

    STEP THREE — U.S. Owners : Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However , if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and T wo, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights. The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New V ehicle Limited W arranty . Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the[...]

  • Page 550

    STEP THREE — Canadian Owners : In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/ Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter , and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter . The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decisi[...]

  • Page 551

    Online Owner Center Online Owner Center (U.S.) — www .gmownercenter .com/chevrolet Information and services customized for your specific vehicle — all in one convenient place. . Digital owner manual, warranty information, and more . Online service and maintenance records . Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide . Exclusive privileges and offers . Recall notices for your specific vehicle . OnStar ® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links: Chevrolet − www .chevrolet.com Chevrolet Merchandise — www .chevymall.com Help Center — www .chevrolet.com/helpcenter . F AQ . Contact Us My GM Canada (Canada) — www .gm.ca My GM Canada is a password-protected se[...]

  • Page 552

    Customer Assistance for T ext T elephone (TTY) Users T o assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use T ext T elephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center . Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Assistance Offices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However , if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to: United States — Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P .O. Box 33170 Detroit, M[...]

  • Page 553

    Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V . Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P . 1 1910, Mexico, D.F . 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 01 1-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift. The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to dete[...]

  • Page 554

    Calling for Assistance When calling Roadside Assistance, have the following information ready: . Y our name, home address, and home telephone number . T elephone number of your location . Location of the vehicle . Model, year , color , and license plate number of the vehicle . Odometer reading, V ehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle . Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first. In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered. Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New V ehicle Limited W ar[...]

  • Page 555

    Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance . Impound towing caused by violation of any laws. . Legal fines. . Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. . T owing or services for vehicles driven on a non-public road or highway . Services Specific to Canadian Purchased V ehicles . Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service. . Lock-Out Service: V ehicle registration is required. . T rip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route. There is a limi[...]

  • Page 556

    Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately , keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/ retailer , let them know this, and ask for instructions. If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as poss[...]

  • Page 557

    Public T ransportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and public transportation is used instead of the dealer's shuttle service, the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs. Courtesy Rental V ehicle Y [...]

  • Page 558

    Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle's designed appearance, durability , and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New V ehicle Warranty . Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair . These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an acceptable choice to ma[...]

  • Page 559

    Insuring Y our V ehicle Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with comprehensive and collision insurance coverage. There are significant differences in the quality of coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms. Many insurance policies provide reduced protection to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some insurance companies will not specify aftermarket collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired with GM original equipment collision parts. If such insurance coverage is not available from your current insurance carrier , consider switching to another insurance [...]

  • Page 560

    . Gather the important information you will need from the other driver . Things like name, address, phone number , driver's license number , vehicle license plate, vehicle make, model and model year , V ehicle Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and policy number , and a general description of the damage to the other vehicle. . If possible, call your insurance company from the scene of the crash. They will walk you through the information they will need. If they ask for a police report, phone or go to the police department headquarters the next day and you can get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. In some states/ provinces with “ no fault ” insurance laws, a report [...]

  • Page 561

    Reporting Safety Defects Reporting Safety Defects to the United States Government If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway T raffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying General Motors. If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However , NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer , or General Motors. T o contact NHTSA, you may call the V ehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY : 1[...]

  • Page 562

    Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA (or T ransport Canada) in a situation like this, please notify General Motors. Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P .O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write: General Motors of Canada Limited Customer Communication Centre, CA1-163-005 1908 Colonel Sam Drive Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7 Service Publications Ordering Information Service Manuals Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair information on engines, transmission, axle suspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body , etc. Service Bull[...]

  • Page 563

    Current and Past Model Order Forms T echnical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. T o request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com Or you can write to: Helm, Incorporated P .O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery . Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. f[...]

  • Page 564

    Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: . How various systems in your vehicle were operating . Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened . How far , if at all, the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake p[...]

  • Page 565

    OnStar ® If the vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar T erms and Conditions for information on data collection and use. Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security , as well as in connection with conveniences such as key fobs for remote door locking/[...]

  • Page 566

    2 NOTES 8-20[...]

  • Page 567

    A Accessories and Modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33 Accessory Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15 Active Fuel Management ™ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-37 Add-On Electrical Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-35 Air Cleaner/Filter , Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20 Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 568

    Appearance Care (cont.) Sheet Metal Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 T ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 W ashing Y our V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Assistance Program, Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 569

    C Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 W arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 California Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-62 Canadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii Capacities and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 12 Carbon Monoxide Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 570

    Cleaning (cont.) Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-96 Leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-98 T ires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 Underbody Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-102 W ashing Y our V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Weatherstrips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-99 Windshield and Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-100 Climate Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 571

    Door Delayed Locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1 Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10 Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1 Programmable Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1 Rear Door Security Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Driver Information Center (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 DIC Operation and Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43, 4-51 DIC Vehicle Customization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-68 DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 572

    Engine (cont.) Oil Pressure Gage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Overheated Protection Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . 6-33 Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31 Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-34 Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-18 Entry/Exit Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14 Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Extender , Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 573

    Fuses Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-107 Fuses and Circuit Breakers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 Instrument Panel Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-105 Underhood Fuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-108 Windshield Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 G Gages Engine Coolant T emperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 574

    I Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-32 Infants and Y oung Children, Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Inflation - T ire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-62 Instrument Panel Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 Instrument Panel Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 Integrated T railer Brake Control System (ITBC) . . . . 5-47 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 J Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 575

    Lights (cont.) Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 Highbeam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Low Fuel W arning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-38 On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 1 Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4[...]

  • Page 576

    N Navigation System, Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 14 New V ehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-31 O Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 T rip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Page 577

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 Passenger Sensing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-71 Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 1 Perchlorate Materials Requirements, California . . . . . . 6-4 Phone Bluetooth ® ............ ............ ............. .. 4 - 1 1 4 Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 1 Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-104 Lumbar Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6 Retained Accessory (RAP) . . . . . [...]

  • Page 578

    Recovery Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31 Recreational V ehicle T owing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Reimbursement Program, GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Removing the Flat T ire and Installing the Spare T ire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-84 Removing the Spare Tire and T ools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-79 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-52 Re[...]

  • Page 579

    Seats (cont.) Power Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Rear Seat Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-13 Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10 Secondary Latch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-89 Securing a Child Restraint Center Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56 Rear Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Right Front Seat Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-57 Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 580

    Storage Areas (cont.) Front Armrest Storage Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74 Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-74 Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-75 T op-Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-92 System Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 581

    T op-Box Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-91 T ow/Haul Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-42 T ow/Haul Mode Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 T owing Recreational V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 T owing a Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 T railer Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-66 Y our V ehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 T raction StabiliT rak ® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Page 582

    W W arning Lights, Gages, and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 W arnings DIC Warnings and Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-57 Hazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 Safety and Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv Wheels Alignment and Tire Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-72 Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-74 When It Is T ime for New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-70 Where to Put the Child [...]